680002

ZyXEL NBG334S Handleiding

148
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/278
Pagina verder
www.zyxel.com
NBG334S
802.11g Wireless Firewall Router
User’s Guide
Version 3.60
8/2007
Edition 1
DEFAULT LOGIN
IP Address http://192.168.1.1
User Name admin
Password 1234
About This User's Guide
NBG334S User’s Guide
3
About This User's Guide
Intended Audience
This manual is intended for people who want to configure the NBG334S using the web
configurator. You should have at least a basic knowledge of TCP/IP networking concepts and
topology.
Related Documentation
• Quick Start Guide
The Quick Start Guide is designed to help you get up and running right away. It contains
information on setting up your network and configuring for Internet access.
• Web Configurator Online Help
Embedded web help for descriptions of individual screens and supplementary
information.
" It is recommended you use the web configurator to configure the NBG334S.
• Supporting Disk
Refer to the included CD for support documents.
• ZyXEL Web Site
Please refer to www.zyxel.com
for additional support documentation and product
certifications.
User Guide Feedback
Help us help you. Send all User Guide-related comments, questions or suggestions for
improvement to the following address, or use e-mail instead. Thank you!
The Technical Writing Team,
ZyXEL Communications Corp.,
6 Innovation Road II,
Science-Based Industrial Park,
Hsinchu, 300, Taiwan.
E-mail: techwriters@zyxel.com.tw
Document Conventions
NBG334S User’s Guide
4
Document Conventions
Warnings and Notes
These are how warnings and notes are shown in this User’s Guide.
1 Warnings tell you about things that could harm you or your device.
" Notes tell you other important information (for example, other things you may
need to configure or helpful tips) or recommendations.
Syntax Conventions
• The NBG334S may be referred to as the “NBG334S”, the “device”, the “product” or the
“system” in this User’s Guide.
• Product labels, screen names, field labels and field choices are all in bold font.
• A key stroke is denoted by square brackets and uppercase text, for example, [ENTER]
means the “enter” or “return” key on your keyboard.
• “Enter” means for you to type one or more characters and then press the [ENTER] key.
“Select” or “choose” means for you to use one of the predefined choices.
• A right angle bracket ( > ) within a screen name denotes a mouse click. For example,
Maintenance > Log > Log Setting means you first click Maintenance in the navigation
panel, then the Log sub menu and finally the Log Setting tab to get to that screen.
• Units of measurement may denote the “metric” value or the “scientific” value. For
example, “k” for kilo may denote “1000” or “1024”, “M” for mega may denote “1000000”
or “1048576” and so on.
• “e.g.,” is a shorthand for “for instance”, and “i.e.,” means “that is” or “in other words”.
Document Conventions
NBG334S User’s Guide
5
Icons Used in Figures
Figures in this User’s Guide may use the following generic icons. The NBG334S icon is not an
exact representation of your device.
NBG334S Computer Notebook computer
Server DSLAM Firewall
Telephone Switch Router
Modem
Safety Warnings
NBG334S User’s Guide
6
Safety Warnings
1 For your safety, be sure to read and follow all warning notices and instructions.
• Do NOT use this product near water, for example, in a wet basement or near a swimming
pool.
• Do NOT expose your device to dampness, dust or corrosive liquids.
• Do NOT store things on the device.
• Do NOT install, use, or service this device during a thunderstorm. There is a remote risk
of electric shock from lightning.
• Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device.
• Do NOT open the device or unit. Opening or removing covers can expose you to
dangerous high voltage points or other risks. ONLY qualified service personnel should
service or disassemble this device. Please contact your vendor for further information.
• Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports.
• Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them.
• Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling.
• Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device.
• Connect the power adaptor or cord to the right supply voltage (for example, 110V AC in
North America or 230V AC in Europe).
• Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the
product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor or cord.
• Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause
electrocution.
• If the power adaptor or cord is damaged, remove it from the power outlet.
• Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord. Contact your local vendor to order a
new one.
• Do not use the device outside, and make sure all the connections are indoors. There is a
remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
• Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots, as insufficient airflow may harm your
device.
• Antenna Warning! This device meets ETSI and FCC certification requirements when
using the included antenna(s). Only use the included antenna(s).
• If you wall mount your device, make sure that no electrical lines, gas or water pipes will
be damaged.
This product is recyclable. Dispose of it properly.
Safety Warnings
NBG334S User’s Guide
7
Safety Warnings
NBG334S User’s Guide
8
Contents Overview
NBG334S User’s Guide
9
Contents Overview
Introduction ............................................................................................................................ 27
Getting to Know Your NBG334S ................................................................................................ 29
Introducing the Web Configurator .............................................................................................. 33
Connection Wizard .................................................................................................................... 45
AP Mode .................................................................................................................................... 61
Network ................................................................................................................................... 67
Wireless LAN ............................................................................................................................. 69
Wireless Tutorial ........................................................................................................................ 89
WAN .......................................................................................................................................... 93
LAN .......................................................................................................................................... 103
DHCP ...................................................................................................................................... 109
Network Address Translation (NAT) .........................................................................................113
Dynamic DNS .......................................................................................................................... 123
Security ................................................................................................................................. 125
Firewall .................................................................................................................................... 127
Content Filtering ...................................................................................................................... 133
Management ......................................................................................................................... 137
Static Route Screens ............................................................................................................... 139
Bandwidth Management .......................................................................................................... 143
Remote Management ..............................................................................................................153
Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) ............................................................................................. 159
Maintenance and Troubleshooting ..................................................................................... 171
System ..................................................................................................................................... 173
Logs ......................................................................................................................................... 177
Tools ........................................................................................................................................ 191
Configuration Mode ................................................................................................................. 197
Sys Op Mode ........................................................................................................................... 199
Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................................... 203
Appendices and Index .........................................................................................................209
Contents Overview
NBG334S User’s Guide
10
Table of Contents
NBG334S User’s Guide
11
Table of Contents
About This User's Guide .......................................................................................................... 3
Document Conventions............................................................................................................4
Safety Warnings........................................................................................................................ 6
Contents Overview ...................................................................................................................9
Table of Contents.................................................................................................................... 11
List of Figures .........................................................................................................................19
List of Tables........................................................................................................................... 23
Part I: Introduction................................................................................. 27
Chapter 1
Getting to Know Your NBG334S............................................................................................ 29
1.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 29
1.2 AP Mode .............................................................................................................................. 29
1.3 Router Mode ........................................................................................................................ 30
1.4 Router Features vs. AP Features ........................................................................................ 30
1.5 Ways to Manage the NBG334S ........................................................................................... 31
1.6 Good Habits for Managing the NBG334S ............................................................................ 31
1.7 LEDs .................................................................................................................................... 31
Chapter 2
Introducing the Web Configurator ........................................................................................ 33
2.1 Web Configurator Overview ................................................................................................. 33
2.2 Accessing the Web Configurator ......................................................................................... 33
2.3 Resetting the NBG334S ......................................................................................................35
2.3.1 Procedure to Use the Reset Button ........................................................................... 35
2.4 Navigating the Web Configurator ...................................................................................... 35
2.5 The Status Screen in Router Mode ..................................................................................... 35
2.5.1 Navigation Panel ........................................................................................................ 38
2.5.2 Summary: Any IP Table .............................................................................................. 40
2.5.3 Summary: Bandwidth Management Monitor ........................................................... 40
2.5.4 Summary: DHCP Table ........................................................................................... 41
2.5.5 Summary: Packet Statistics ..................................................................................... 41
Table of Contents
NBG334S User’s Guide
12
2.5.6 Summary: Wireless Station Status ......................................................................... 42
Chapter 3
Connection Wizard .................................................................................................................45
3.1 Wizard Setup ....................................................................................................................... 45
3.2 Connection Wizard: STEP 1: System Information ............................................................... 46
3.2.1 System Name ............................................................................................................. 46
3.2.2 Domain Name ............................................................................................................ 47
3.3 Connection Wizard: STEP 2: Wireless LAN ........................................................................ 47
3.3.1 Basic (WEP) Security ................................................................................................. 49
3.3.2 Extend (WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK) Security ............................................................... 50
3.4 Connection Wizard: STEP 3: Internet Configuration ........................................................... 50
3.4.1 Ethernet Connection .................................................................................................. 51
3.4.2 PPPoE Connection .................................................................................................... 51
3.4.3 PPTP Connection ....................................................................................................... 52
3.4.4 Your IP Address ......................................................................................................... 54
3.4.5 WAN IP Address Assignment ..................................................................................... 54
3.4.6 IP Address and Subnet Mask ..................................................................................... 55
3.4.7 DNS Server Address Assignment .............................................................................. 55
3.4.8 WAN IP and DNS Server Address Assignment ......................................................... 56
3.4.9 WAN MAC Address .................................................................................................... 57
3.5 Connection Wizard: STEP 4: Bandwidth management ....................................................... 58
3.6 Connection Wizard Complete .............................................................................................. 58
Chapter 4
AP Mode................................................................................................................................... 61
4.1 AP Mode Overview .............................................................................................................. 61
4.2 Setting your NBG334S to AP Mode .................................................................................... 61
4.3 The Status Screen in AP Mode ........................................................................................... 62
4.3.1 Navigation Panel ........................................................................................................ 64
4.4 Configuring Your Settings .................................................................................................... 65
4.4.1 LAN Settings .............................................................................................................. 65
4.4.2 WLAN and Maintenance Settings .............................................................................. 66
4.5 Logging in to the Web Configurator in AP Mode ................................................................. 66
Part II: Network....................................................................................... 67
Chapter 5
Wireless LAN........................................................................................................................... 69
5.1 Wireless Network Overview ................................................................................................. 69
5.2 Wireless Security Overview .................................................................................................71
Table of Contents
NBG334S User’s Guide
13
5.2.1 SSID ........................................................................................................................... 71
5.2.2 MAC Address Filter .................................................................................................... 71
5.2.3 User Authentication .................................................................................................... 72
5.2.4 Encryption .................................................................................................................. 72
5.3 Roaming .............................................................................................................................. 73
5.3.1 Requirements for Roaming ........................................................................................ 74
5.4 Quality of Service ................................................................................................................ 74
5.4.1 WMM QoS ..................................................................................................................75
5.5 General Wireless LAN Screen ............................................................................................ 75
5.5.1 No Security ................................................................................................................. 76
5.5.2 WEP Encryption ......................................................................................................... 77
5.5.3 WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK ................................................................................................ 79
5.5.4 WPA/WPA2 ................................................................................................................ 80
5.6 MAC Filter ............................................................................................................................ 82
5.7 Wireless LAN Advanced Screen ......................................................................................... 83
5.8 Quality of Service (QoS) Screen ......................................................................................... 84
5.8.1 Application Priority Configuration ............................................................................... 86
Chapter 6
Wireless Tutorial ..................................................................................................................... 89
6.1 How to Connect to the Internet from a Notebook ................................................................ 89
6.1.1 Example Parameters .................................................................................................. 89
6.2 Enable and Configure Wireless Security on your NBG334S ............................................... 89
6.3 Configure Your Notebook ....................................................................................................91
Chapter 7
WAN.......................................................................................................................................... 93
7.1 WAN Overview .................................................................................................................... 93
7.2 WAN MAC Address ............................................................................................................. 93
7.3 Multicast .............................................................................................................................. 93
7.4 Internet Connection ............................................................................................................. 94
7.4.1 Ethernet Encapsulation .............................................................................................. 94
7.4.2 PPPoE Encapsulation ................................................................................................ 95
7.4.3 PPTP Encapsulation .................................................................................................. 98
7.5 Advanced WAN Screen ..................................................................................................... 101
Chapter 8
LAN......................................................................................................................................... 103
8.1 LAN Overview .................................................................................................................... 103
8.1.1 IP Pool Setup ........................................................................................................... 103
8.1.2 System DNS Servers ............................................................................................... 103
8.2 LAN TCP/IP ....................................................................................................................... 103
8.2.1 Factory LAN Defaults ............................................................................................... 103
Table of Contents
NBG334S User’s Guide
14
8.2.2 IP Address and Subnet Mask ................................................................................... 104
8.2.3 Multicast ................................................................................................................... 104
8.2.4 Any IP ....................................................................................................................... 104
8.3 LAN IP Screen ................................................................................................................... 106
8.4 LAN IP Alias ..................................................................................................................... 106
8.5 Advanced LAN Screen ...................................................................................................... 107
Chapter 9
DHCP...................................................................................................................................... 109
9.1 DHCP ................................................................................................................................ 109
9.2 DHCP Server General Screen ........................................................................................... 109
9.3 DHCP Server Advanced Screen .....................................................................................110
9.4 Client List Screen ...............................................................................................................111
Chapter 10
Network Address Translation (NAT).................................................................................... 113
10.1 NAT Overview ................................................................................................................113
10.2 Using NAT .........................................................................................................................113
10.2.1 Port Forwarding: Services and Port Numbers .........................................................113
10.2.2 Configuring Servers Behind Port Forwarding Example ...........................................114
10.3 General NAT Screen .........................................................................................................114
10.4 NAT Application Screen ..................................................................................................115
10.4.1 Game List Example .................................................................................................117
10.5 Trigger Port Forwarding ....................................................................................................118
10.5.1 Trigger Port Forwarding Example ...........................................................................118
10.5.2 Two Points To Remember About Trigger Ports .......................................................119
10.6 NAT Advanced Screen .....................................................................................................119
Chapter 11
Dynamic DNS ........................................................................................................................ 123
11.1 Dynamic DNS Introduction .............................................................................................. 123
11.1.1 DynDNS Wildcard .................................................................................................. 123
11.2 Dynamic DNS Screen .................................................................................................... 123
Part III: Security.................................................................................... 125
Chapter 12
Firewall................................................................................................................................... 127
12.1 Introduction to ZyXEL’s Firewall .................................................................................... 127
12.1.1 What is a Firewall? ................................................................................................. 127
12.1.2 Stateful Inspection Firewall .................................................................................... 127
Table of Contents
NBG334S User’s Guide
15
12.1.3 About the NBG334S Firewall ................................................................................. 127
12.1.4 Guidelines For Enhancing Security With Your Firewall .......................................... 128
12.2 Triangle Routes ............................................................................................................... 128
12.2.1 Triangle Routes and IP Alias .................................................................................. 128
12.3 General Firewall Screen ............................................................................................... 129
12.4 Services Screen ............................................................................................................. 130
Chapter 13
Content Filtering ................................................................................................................... 133
13.1 Introduction to Content Filtering ...................................................................................... 133
13.2 Restrict Web Features .....................................................................................................133
13.3 Days and Times ............................................................................................................... 133
13.4 Filter Screen .................................................................................................................... 133
13.5 Schedule .......................................................................................................................... 135
13.6 Customizing Keyword Blocking URL Checking ............................................................... 136
13.6.1 Domain Name or IP Address URL Checking ......................................................... 136
13.6.2 Full Path URL Checking ......................................................................................... 136
13.6.3 File Name URL Checking ....................................................................................... 136
Part IV: Management............................................................................ 137
Chapter 14
Static Route Screens ............................................................................................................139
14.1 Static Route Overview .....................................................................................................139
14.2 IP Static Route Screen ....................................................................................................139
14.2.1 Static Route Setup Screen ................................................................................... 140
Chapter 15
Bandwidth Management.......................................................................................................143
15.1 Bandwidth Management Overview ................................................................................. 143
15.2 Application-based Bandwidth Management .................................................................... 143
15.3 Subnet-based Bandwidth Management .......................................................................... 143
15.4 Application and Subnet-based Bandwidth Management ................................................. 144
15.5 Bandwidth Management Priorities ................................................................................... 144
15.6 Predefined Bandwidth Management Services ................................................................. 145
15.6.1 Services and Port Numbers ................................................................................... 146
15.7 Default Bandwidth Management Classes and Priorities .................................................. 148
15.8 Bandwidth Management General Configuration ............................................................. 149
15.9 Bandwidth Management Advanced Configuration .......................................................... 149
15.9.1 Rule Configuration .............................................................................................. 151
15.10 Bandwidth Management Monitor ................................................................................ 152
Table of Contents
NBG334S User’s Guide
16
Chapter 16
Remote Management............................................................................................................153
16.1 Remote Management Overview ...................................................................................... 153
16.1.1 Remote Management Limitations .......................................................................... 153
16.1.2 Remote Management and NAT .............................................................................. 154
16.1.3 System Timeout .................................................................................................... 154
16.2 WWW Screen ............................................................................................................... 154
16.3 Telnet ............................................................................................................................... 155
16.4 Telnet Screen ................................................................................................................... 155
16.5 FTP Screen ..................................................................................................................... 156
16.6 DNS Screen .................................................................................................................. 157
Chapter 17
Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP).......................................................................................... 159
17.1 Introducing Universal Plug and Play ............................................................................... 159
17.1.1 How do I know if I'm using UPnP? ......................................................................... 159
17.1.2 NAT Traversal ........................................................................................................ 159
17.1.3 Cautions with UPnP ............................................................................................... 159
17.2 UPnP and ZyXEL ............................................................................................................160
17.3 UPnP Screen ................................................................................................................... 160
17.4 Installing UPnP in Windows Example .............................................................................. 161
Part V: Maintenance and Troubleshooting ........................................ 171
Chapter 18
System ................................................................................................................................... 173
18.1 System Overview ............................................................................................................. 173
18.2 System General Screen ................................................................................................. 173
18.3 Time Setting Screen ........................................................................................................ 174
Chapter 19
Logs ....................................................................................................................................... 177
19.1 View Log ......................................................................................................................... 177
19.2 Log Settings ..................................................................................................................... 178
19.3 Log Descriptions .............................................................................................................. 181
Chapter 20
Tools....................................................................................................................................... 191
20.1 Firmware Upload Screen ................................................................................................. 191
20.2 Configuration Screen ....................................................................................................... 192
20.2.1 Backup Configuration ............................................................................................. 193
Table of Contents
NBG334S User’s Guide
17
20.2.2 Restore Configuration ............................................................................................ 193
20.2.3 Back to Factory Defaults ........................................................................................ 194
20.3 Restart Screen ................................................................................................................. 194
Chapter 21
Configuration Mode..............................................................................................................197
Chapter 22
Sys Op Mode ......................................................................................................................... 199
22.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 199
22.1.1 Router .................................................................................................................... 199
22.1.2 AP .......................................................................................................................... 199
22.2 Selecting System Operation Mode .................................................................................. 200
Chapter 23
Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................203
23.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs ...................................................................... 203
23.2 NBG334S Access and Login ........................................................................................... 204
23.3 Internet Access ................................................................................................................ 206
23.4 Resetting the NBG334S to Its Factory Defaults .............................................................. 207
23.5 Wireless Router/AP Troubleshooting ............................................................................... 207
23.6 Advanced Features .........................................................................................................208
Part VI: Appendices and Index ........................................................... 209
Appendix A Product Specifications and Wall-Mounting Instructions .................................... 211
Appendix B Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions ......................................217
Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting ........................................................................... 223
Appendix D Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address ...........................................................231
23.6.1 Verifying Settings ................................................................................................... 246
Appendix E Wireless LANs ..................................................................................................247
23.6.2 WPA(2)-PSK Application Example ......................................................................... 256
23.6.3 WPA(2) with RADIUS Application Example ........................................................... 256
Appendix F Services ............................................................................................................ 259
Appendix G Legal Information.............................................................................................. 263
Appendix H Customer Support............................................................................................. 267
Index....................................................................................................................................... 273
Table of Contents
NBG334S User’s Guide
18
List of Figures
NBG334S User’s Guide
19
List of Figures
Figure 1 Wireless Internet Access in AP Mode ..................................................................................... 29
Figure 2 Secure Wireless Internet Access in Router Mode ................................................................... 30
Figure 3 Front Panel ............................................................................................................................... 31
Figure 4 Change Password Screen ........................................................................................................ 34
Figure 5 Web Configurator Status Screen ............................................................................................. 36
Figure 6 Any IP Table ............................................................................................................................ 40
Figure 7 Summary: BW MGMT Monitor ................................................................................................. 40
Figure 8 Summary: DHCP Table ............................................................................................................ 41
Figure 9 Summary: Packet Statistics ..................................................................................................... 42
Figure 10 Summary: Wireless Association List ...................................................................................... 43
Figure 11 Select Wizard or Advanced Mode .......................................................................................... 45
Figure 12 Select a Language ................................................................................................................. 46
Figure 13 Welcome to the Connection Wizard ....................................................................................... 46
Figure 14 Wizard Step 1: System Information ........................................................................................ 47
Figure 15 Wizard Step 2: Wireless LAN ................................................................................................. 48
Figure 16 Wizard Step 2: Basic (WEP) Security ..................................................................................... 49
Figure 17 Wizard Step 2: Extend (WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK) Security ................................................... 50
Figure 18 Wizard Step 3: ISP Parameters. ............................................................................................. 51
Figure 19 Wizard Step 3: Ethernet Connection ...................................................................................... 51
Figure 20 Wizard Step 3: PPPoE Connection ........................................................................................ 52
Figure 21 Wizard Step 3: PPTP Connection .......................................................................................... 53
Figure 22 Wizard Step 3: Your IP Address ............................................................................................. 54
Figure 23 Wizard Step 3: WAN IP and DNS Server Addresses ............................................................. 56
Figure 24 Wizard Step 3: WAN MAC Address ........................................................................................ 57
Figure 25 Wizard Step 4: Bandwidth Management ............................................................................... 58
Figure 26 Connection Wizard Save ....................................................................................................... 59
Figure 27 Connection Wizard Complete ................................................................................................. 59
Figure 28 Wireless Internet Access in AP Mode ................................................................................... 61
Figure 29 Maintenance > Sys OP Mode > General ................................................................................ 62
Figure 30 Status: AP Mode .................................................................................................................... 62
Figure 31 Menu: AP Mode ...................................................................................................................... 64
Figure 32 Network > LAN > IP ............................................................................................................. 65
Figure 33 Example of a Wireless Network ............................................................................................. 69
Figure 34 Roaming Example .................................................................................................................. 74
Figure 35 Network > Wireless LAN > General ...................................................................................... 76
Figure 36 Network > Wireless LAN > General: No Security ................................................................... 77
Figure 37 Network > Wireless LAN > General: Static WEP ................................................................... 78
Figure 38 Network > Wireless LAN > General: WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK .................................................. 79
List of Figures
NBG334S User’s Guide
20
Figure 39 Network > Wireless LAN > General: WPA/WPA2 ................................................................... 80
Figure 40 Network > Wireless LAN > MAC Filter ................................................................................... 82
Figure 41 Network > Wireless LAN > Advanced ....................................................................................83
Figure 42 Network > Wireless LAN > QoS ............................................................................................ 85
Figure 43 Network > Wireless LAN > QoS: Application Priority Configuration ....................................... 86
Figure 44 Wireless AP Connection to the Internet ................................................................................. 89
Figure 45 Network > Wireless LAN > General ....................................................................................... 90
Figure 46 Status: AP Mode ..................................................................................................................... 90
Figure 47 Connecting a Wireless Client to a Wireless Network t ........................................................... 91
Figure 48 Security Settings ................................................................................................................... 91
Figure 49 Confirm Save .......................................................................................................................... 92
Figure 50 Link Status ............................................................................................................................. 92
Figure 51 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: Ethernet Encapsulation ........................................... 94
Figure 52 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: PPPoE Encapsulation ............................................. 96
Figure 53 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: PPTP Encapsulation ............................................... 99
Figure 54 Network > WAN > Advanced ............................................................................................... 101
Figure 55 Any IP Example .................................................................................................................... 105
Figure 56 Network > LAN > IP ............................................................................................................. 106
Figure 57 Network > LAN > IP Alias .................................................................................................... 107
Figure 58 Network > LAN > Advanced .............................................................................................. 107
Figure 59 Network > DHCP Server > General .................................................................................. 109
Figure 60 Network > DHCP Server > Advanced ..................................................................................110
Figure 61 Network > DHCP Server > Client List ................................................................................ 111
Figure 62 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example .................................................................................114
Figure 63 Network > NAT > General ....................................................................................................114
Figure 64 Network > NAT > Application ...............................................................................................116
Figure 65 Game List Example ...............................................................................................................118
Figure 66 Trigger Port Forwarding Process: Example ...........................................................................119
Figure 67 Network > NAT > Advanced ................................................................................................ 120
Figure 68 Dynamic DNS ....................................................................................................................... 124
Figure 69 Using IP Alias to Solve the Triangle Route Problem ............................................................ 129
Figure 70 Security > Firewall > General l ............................................................................................. 129
Figure 71 Security > Firewall > Services ............................................................................................. 131
Figure 72 Security > Content Filter > Filter .......................................................................................... 134
Figure 73 Security > Content Filter > Schedule .................................................................................... 135
Figure 74 Example of Static Routing Topology ..................................................................................... 139
Figure 75 Management > Static Route > IP Static Route ..................................................................... 140
Figure 76 Management > Static Route > IP Static Route: Static Route Setup ..................................... 141
Figure 77 Subnet-based Bandwidth Management Example ................................................................ 144
Figure 78 Management > Bandwidth MGMT > General .................................................................... 149
Figure 79 Management > Bandwidth MGMT > Advanced .................................................................. 150
Figure 80 Management > Bandwidth MGMT > Advanced: User-defined Service Rule Configuration 151
Figure 81 Management > Bandwidth MGMT > Monitor ...................................................................... 152
List of Figures
NBG334S User’s Guide
21
Figure 82 Management > Remote MGMT > WWW ............................................................................ 154
Figure 83 Telnet Configuration on a TCP/IP Network ........................................................................... 155
Figure 84 Management > Remote MGMT > Telnet ............................................................................. 155
Figure 85 Management > Remote MGMT > FTP ................................................................................ 156
Figure 86 Management > Remote MGMT > DNS ............................................................................... 157
Figure 87 Management > UPnP > General .........................................................................................160
Figure 88 Add/Remove Programs: Windows Setup: Communication .................................................. 161
Figure 89 Add/Remove Programs: Windows Setup: Communication: Components ............................ 162
Figure 90 Network Connections ........................................................................................................... 162
Figure 91 Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard ............................................................ 163
Figure 92 Networking Services ............................................................................................................. 163
Figure 93 Network Connections ........................................................................................................... 164
Figure 94 Internet Connection Properties ............................................................................................ 165
Figure 95 Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings ............................................................. 166
Figure 96 Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings: Add .................................................... 166
Figure 97 System Tray Icon .................................................................................................................. 167
Figure 98 Internet Connection Status ................................................................................................... 167
Figure 99 Network Connections ........................................................................................................... 168
Figure 100 Network Connections: My Network Places ........................................................................ 169
Figure 101 Network Connections: My Network Places: Properties: Example ...................................... 169
Figure 102 Maintenance > System > General .....................................................................................173
Figure 103 Maintenance > System > Time Setting .............................................................................. 174
Figure 104 Maintenance > Logs > View Log ....................................................................................... 177
Figure 105 Maintenance > Logs > Log Settings ..................................................................................179
Figure 106 Maintenance > Tools > Firmware ...................................................................................... 191
Figure 107 Upload Warning .................................................................................................................. 192
Figure 108 Network Temporarily Disconnected ....................................................................................192
Figure 109 Upload Error Message ....................................................................................................... 192
Figure 110 Maintenance > Tools > Configuration ................................................................................193
Figure 111 Configuration Restore Successful ....................................................................................... 194
Figure 112 Temporarily Disconnected .................................................................................................. 194
Figure 113 Configuration Restore Error ................................................................................................ 194
Figure 114 Maintenance > Tools > Restart .......................................................................................... 195
Figure 115 Maintenance > Config Mode > General ............................................................................. 197
Figure 116 LAN and WAN IP Addresses in Router Mode .................................................................... 199
Figure 117 IP Address in AP Mode ...................................................................................................... 200
Figure 118 Maintenance > Sys OP Mode > General ........................................................................... 200
Figure 119 Maintenance > Sys Op Mode > General: Router ............................................................... 200
Figure 120 Maintenance > Sys Op Mode > General: AP ..................................................................... 201
Figure 121 Wall-mounting Example ...................................................................................................... 215
Figure 122 Masonry Plug and M4 Tap Screw .......................................................................................215
Figure 123 Pop-up Blocker ................................................................................................................... 217
Figure 124 Internet Options: Privacy .................................................................................................... 218
List of Figures
NBG334S User’s Guide
22
Figure 125 Internet Options: Privacy .................................................................................................... 219
Figure 126 Pop-up Blocker Settings ..................................................................................................... 219
Figure 127 Internet Options: Security ................................................................................................... 220
Figure 128 Security Settings - Java Scripting ....................................................................................... 221
Figure 129 Security Settings - Java ...................................................................................................... 221
Figure 130 Java (Sun) .......................................................................................................................... 222
Figure 131 Network Number and Host ID ............................................................................................ 224
Figure 132 Subnetting Example: Before Subnetting ............................................................................ 226
Figure 133 Subnetting Example: After Subnetting ............................................................................... 227
Figure 134 WIndows 95/98/Me: Network: Configuration ...................................................................... 232
Figure 135 Windows 95/98/Me: TCP/IP Properties: IP Address .......................................................... 233
Figure 136 Windows 95/98/Me: TCP/IP Properties: DNS Configuration .............................................. 234
Figure 137 Windows XP: Start Menu .................................................................................................... 235
Figure 138 Windows XP: Control Panel ............................................................................................... 235
Figure 139 Windows XP: Control Panel: Network Connections: Properties ......................................... 236
Figure 140 Windows XP: Local Area Connection Properties ............................................................... 236
Figure 141 Windows XP: Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties .......................................................... 237
Figure 142 Windows XP: Advanced TCP/IP Properties ....................................................................... 238
Figure 143 Windows XP: Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties .......................................................... 239
Figure 144 Macintosh OS 8/9: Apple Menu .......................................................................................... 240
Figure 145 Macintosh OS 8/9: TCP/IP ................................................................................................. 240
Figure 146 Macintosh OS X: Apple Menu ............................................................................................ 241
Figure 147 Macintosh OS X: Network .................................................................................................. 242
Figure 148 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Network Configuration: Devices ......................................................... 243
Figure 149 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Ethernet Device: General ................................................................... 244
Figure 150 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Network Configuration: DNS ............................................................... 244
Figure 151 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Network Configuration: Activate ......................................................... 245
Figure 152 Red Hat 9.0: Dynamic IP Address Setting in ifconfig-eth0 ................................................ 245
Figure 153 Red Hat 9.0: Static IP Address Setting in ifconfig-eth0 ................................................... 245
Figure 154 Red Hat 9.0: DNS Settings in resolv.conf ........................................................................ 246
Figure 155 Red Hat 9.0: Restart Ethernet Card .................................................................................. 246
Figure 156 Red Hat 9.0: Checking TCP/IP Properties ........................................................................ 246
Figure 157 Peer-to-Peer Communication in an Ad-hoc Network ......................................................... 247
Figure 158 Basic Service Set ............................................................................................................... 248
Figure 159 Infrastructure WLAN ........................................................................................................... 249
Figure 160 RTS/CTS ........................................................................................................................... 250
Figure 161 WPA(2)-PSK Authentication ............................................................................................... 256
List of Tables
NBG334S User’s Guide
23
List of Tables
Table 1 Features Available in Router Mode vs. AP Mode ..................................................................... 30
Table 2 Front Panel LEDs ...................................................................................................................... 31
Table 3 Status Screen Icon Key ............................................................................................................. 36
Table 4 Web Configurator Status Screen ........................................................................................... 37
Table 5 Screens Summary .................................................................................................................... 38
Table 6 Summary: DHCP Table ............................................................................................................. 41
Table 7 Summary: Packet Statistics ...................................................................................................... 42
Table 8 Summary: Wireless Association List ......................................................................................... 43
Table 9 Wizard Step 1: System Information ........................................................................................... 47
Table 10 Wizard Step 2: Wireless LAN .................................................................................................. 48
Table 11 Wizard Step 2: Basic (WEP) Security ..................................................................................... 49
Table 12 Wizard Step 2: Extend (WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK) Security ................................................... 50
Table 13 Wizard Step 3: ISP Parameters .............................................................................................. 51
Table 14 Wizard Step 3: PPPoE Connection ......................................................................................... 52
Table 15 Wizard Step 3: PPTP Connection ........................................................................................... 53
Table 16 Wizard Step 3: Your IP Address .............................................................................................. 54
Table 17 Private IP Address Ranges ..................................................................................................... 54
Table 18 Wizard Step 3: WAN IP and DNS Server Addresses .............................................................. 56
Table 19 Example of Network Properties for LAN Servers with Fixed IP Addresses ............................ 57
Table 20 Wizard Step 3: WAN MAC Address ........................................................................................ 57
Table 21 Wizard Step 4: Bandwidth Management ................................................................................. 58
Table 22 Web Configurator Status Screen ........................................................................................... 63
Table 23 Screens Summary .................................................................................................................. 64
Table 24 Network > LAN > IP ............................................................................................................... 66
Table 25 Types of Encryption for Each Type of Authentication ............................................................. 72
Table 26 WMM QoS Priorities ............................................................................................................... 75
Table 27 Network > Wireless LAN > General ........................................................................................ 76
Table 28 Wireless No Security ............................................................................................................... 77
Table 29 Network > Wireless LAN > General: Static WEP .................................................................... 78
Table 30 Network > Wireless LAN > General: WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK .................................................. 79
Table 31 Network > Wireless LAN > General: WPA/WPA2 ................................................................... 81
Table 32 Network > Wireless LAN > MAC Filter .................................................................................... 82
Table 33 Network > Wireless LAN > Advanced ..................................................................................... 83
Table 34 Network > Wireless LAN > QoS .............................................................................................. 85
Table 35 Network > Wireless LAN > QoS: Application Priority Configuration ....................................... 86
Table 36 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: Ethernet Encapsulation ............................................ 95
Table 37 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: PPPoE Encapsulation .............................................. 97
Table 38 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: PPTP Encapsulation .............................................. 100
List of Tables
NBG334S User’s Guide
24
Table 39 WAN > Advanced .................................................................................................................. 102
Table 40 Network > LAN > IP .............................................................................................................. 106
Table 41 Network > LAN > IP Alias ..................................................................................................... 107
Table 42 Network > LAN > Advanced .................................................................................................. 108
Table 43 Network > DHCP Server > General ......................................................................................109
Table 44 Network > DHCP Server > Advanced ....................................................................................110
Table 45 Network > DHCP Server > Client List ....................................................................................112
Table 46 Network > NAT > General ......................................................................................................115
Table 47 NAT Application .....................................................................................................................116
Table 48 Network > NAT > Advanced .................................................................................................. 120
Table 49 Dynamic DNS ....................................................................................................................... 124
Table 50 Security > Firewall > General ................................................................................................ 129
Table 51 Security > Firewall > Services ............................................................................................... 131
Table 52 Security > Content Filter > Filter ........................................................................................... 134
Table 53 Security > Content Filter > Schedule .................................................................................... 135
Table 54 Management > Static Route > IP Static Route ...................................................................... 140
Table 55 Management > Static Route > IP Static Route: Static Route Setup ...................................... 141
Table 56 Application and Subnet-based Bandwidth Management Example ....................................... 144
Table 57 Bandwidth Management Priorities ........................................................................................ 144
Table 58 Media Bandwidth Management Setup: Services .................................................................. 145
Table 59 Commonly Used Services ..................................................................................................... 147
Table 60 Bandwidth Management Priority with Default Classes ......................................................... 148
Table 61 Management > Bandwidth MGMT > General ....................................................................... 149
Table 62 Management > Bandwidth MGMT > Advanced .................................................................... 150
Table 63 Management > Bandwidth MGMT > Advanced: User-defined Service Rule Configuration . 151
Table 64 Management > Remote MGMT > WWW .............................................................................. 154
Table 65 Management > Remote MGMT > Telnet ............................................................................... 156
Table 66 Management > Remote MGMT > FTP ................................................................................. 156
Table 67 Management > Remote MGMT > DNS ................................................................................. 157
Table 68 Management > UPnP > General ........................................................................................... 160
Table 69 Maintenance > System > General ........................................................................................ 173
Table 70 Maintenance > System > Time Setting ................................................................................. 175
Table 71 Maintenance > Logs > View Log ........................................................................................... 178
Table 72 Maintenance > Logs > Log Settings ..................................................................................... 179
Table 73 System Maintenance Logs .................................................................................................... 181
Table 74 System Error Logs ................................................................................................................ 182
Table 75 Access Control Logs ............................................................................................................. 182
Table 76 TCP Reset Logs .................................................................................................................... 182
Table 77 Packet Filter Logs ................................................................................................................. 183
Table 78 ICMP Logs ............................................................................................................................ 183
Table 79 CDR Logs ............................................................................................................................. 184
Table 80 PPP Logs .............................................................................................................................. 184
Table 81 UPnP Logs ............................................................................................................................ 184
List of Tables
NBG334S User’s Guide
25
Table 82 Content Filtering Logs ........................................................................................................... 184
Table 83 Attack Logs ........................................................................................................................... 185
Table 84 PKI Logs ............................................................................................................................... 186
Table 85 802.1X Logs .......................................................................................................................... 187
Table 86 ACL Setting Notes ................................................................................................................ 188
Table 87 ICMP Notes ........................................................................................................................... 188
Table 88 Syslog Logs .......................................................................................................................... 189
Table 89 RFC-2408 ISAKMP Payload Types ...................................................................................... 189
Table 90 Maintenance > Tools > Firmware .......................................................................................... 191
Table 91 Maintenance Restore Configuration ..................................................................................... 193
Table 92 Maintenance > Config Mode > General ............................................................................... 197
Table 93 Advanced Configuration Options ......................................................................................... 198
Table 94 Maintenance > Sys OP Mode > General ............................................................................. 201
Table 95 Hardware Features ................................................................................................................211
Table 96 Firmware Features .................................................................................................................211
Table 97 Feature Specifications ........................................................................................................... 213
Table 98 Standards Supported ............................................................................................................ 213
Table 99 Subnet Mask - Identifying Network Number ......................................................................... 224
Table 100 Subnet Masks ..................................................................................................................... 225
Table 101 Maximum Host Numbers .................................................................................................... 225
Table 102 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation ....................................................................................... 225
Table 103 Subnet 1 .............................................................................................................................. 227
Table 104 Subnet 2 .............................................................................................................................. 228
Table 105 Subnet 3 .............................................................................................................................. 228
Table 106 Subnet 4 .............................................................................................................................. 228
Table 107 Eight Subnets ...................................................................................................................... 228
Table 108 24-bit Network Number Subnet Planning ............................................................................ 229
Table 109 16-bit Network Number Subnet Planning ............................................................................ 229
Table 110 IEEE 802.11g ...................................................................................................................... 251
Table 111 Comparison of EAP Authentication Types ........................................................................... 254
Table 112 Wireless Security Relational Matrix ..................................................................................... 257
Table 113 Examples of Services .......................................................................................................... 259
List of Tables
NBG334S User’s Guide
26
27
PART I
Introduction
Getting to Know Your NBG334S (29)
Introducing the Web Configurator (33)
Connection Wizard (45)
AP Mode (61)
28
NBG334S User’s Guide
29
CHAPTER 1
Getting to Know Your NBG334S
This chapter introduces the main features and applications of the NBG334S.
1.1 Overview
The NBG334S acts as either an access point (AP) or a secure broadband router for all data
passing between the Internet and your local network. In both AP and Router Mode you can
set up a wireless network with other IEEE 802.11b/g compatible devices. The Super G
function allows compatible clients to connect to the NBG334S at high speed. (See Appendix A
on page 211 for more information.) In Router Mode a number of services such as a firewall
and content filtering are also available. You can use media bandwidth management to
efficiently manage traffic on your network. Bandwidth management features allow you to
prioritize time-sensitive or highly important applications such as Voice over the Internet
(VoIP).
1.2 AP Mode
Select AP Mode if you already have a router or gateway on your network which provides
network services such as a firewall or bandwidth management.
The following figure shows computers in a WLAN connecting to the NBG334S, which acts as
an access point (A). The NBG334S allows the wireless computers to share the same Internet
access as the other computers connected to the router (B) on the same network.
Figure 1 Wireless Internet Access in AP Mode
A
B
Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your NBG334S
NBG334S User’s Guide
30
1.3 Router Mode
Select Router Mode if you need to route traffic between your network and another network
such as the Internet, and require important network services such as a firewall or bandwidth
management.
The following figure shows computers in a WLAN connecting to the NBG334S (A), which
has a DSL connection to the Internet. The NBG334S is set to Router Mode and has router
features such as a built-in firewall (B).
Figure 2 Secure Wireless Internet Access in Router Mode
1.4 Router Features vs. AP Features
The following table shows which features are available in Router or AP Mode.
A
B
Table 1 Features Available in Router Mode vs. AP Mode
FEATURE ROUTER MODE AP MODE
DHCP
This allows individual clients to obtain IP addresses at start-
up from a DHCP server.
YES NO
Firewall
This establishes a network security barrier, protecting your
network from attacks and controlling access between your
network and the Internet.
YES NO
Bandwidth Management
This allows you to allocate network bandwidth to specific
applications and or subnets.
YES NO
Any IP
This allows a computer to access the NBG334S when the
IP addresses of the computer and the NBG334S are not in
the same subnet.)
YES NO
Wireless
This allows two or more devices to communicate without
wires, based on IEEE 802.11 wireless standards.
YES YES
Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your NBG334S
NBG334S User’s Guide
31
1.5 Ways to Manage the NBG334S
Use any of the following methods to manage the NBG334S.
• Web Configurator. This is recommended for everyday management of the NBG334S
using a (supported) web browser.
• Command Line Interface. Line commands are mostly used for troubleshooting by service
engineers.
• FTP. Use File Transfer Protocol for firmware upgrades and configuration backup/restore.
1.6 Good Habits for Managing the NBG334S
Do the following things regularly to make the NBG334S more secure and to manage the
NBG334S more effectively.
• Change the password. Use a password that’s not easy to guess and that consists of
different types of characters, such as numbers and letters.
• Write down the password and put it in a safe place.
• Back up the configuration (and make sure you know how to restore it). Restoring an
earlier working configuration may be useful if the device becomes unstable or even
crashes. If you forget your password, you will have to reset the NBG334S to its factory
default settings. If you backed up an earlier configuration file, you would not have to
totally re-configure the NBG334S. You could simply restore your last configuration.
1.7 LEDs
Figure 3 Front Panel
The following table describes the LEDs.
Table 2 Front Panel LEDs
LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION
POWER Green On The NBG334S is receiving power and functioning
properly.
Off The NBG334S is not receiving power.
Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your NBG334S
NBG334S User’s Guide
32
LAN 1-4 Green On The NBG334S has a successful 10MB Ethernet
connection.
Blinking The NBG334S is sending/receiving data.
Amber On The NBG334S has a successful 100MB Ethernet
connection.
Blinking The NBG334S is sending/receiving data.
Off The LAN is not connected.
WAN Green On The NBG334S has a successful 10MB WAN
connection.
Blinking The NBG334S is sending/receiving data.
Amber On The NBG334S has a successful 100MB Ethernet
connection.
Blinking The NBG334S is sending/receiving data.
Off The WAN connection is not ready, or has failed.
WLAN Green On The NBG334S is ready, but is not sending/receiving
data through the wireless LAN.
Blinking The NBG334S is sending/receiving data through the
wireless LAN.
Off The wireless LAN is not ready or has failed.
WPS WPS (WiFi Protected Setup) automatically sets up security on your wireless
network. This function is currently unavailable.
Table 2 Front Panel LEDs (continued)
LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION
NBG334S User’s Guide
33
CHAPTER 2
Introducing the Web
Configurator
This chapter describes how to access the NBG334S web configurator and provides an
overview of its screens.
2.1 Web Configurator Overview
The web configurator is an HTML-based management interface that allows easy setup and
management of the NBG334S via Internet browser. Use Internet Explorer 6.0 and later or
Netscape Navigator 7.0 and later versions or Safari 2.0 or later versions. The recommended
screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels.
In order to use the web configurator you need to allow:
• Web browser pop-up windows from your device. Web pop-up blocking is enabled by
default in Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2.
• JavaScripts (enabled by default).
• Java permissions (enabled by default).
Refer to the Troubleshooting chapter to see how to make sure these functions are allowed in
Internet Explorer.
2.2 Accessing the Web Configurator
1 Make sure your NBG334S hardware is properly connected and prepare your computer or
computer network to connect to the NBG334S (refer to the Quick Start Guide).
2 Launch your web browser.
3 Type "http://192.168.1.1" as the website address.
Your computer must be in the same subnet in order to access this website address.
•In Router Mode enable the DHCP Server. The NBG334S assigns your computer an IP
address on the same subnet.
•In AP Mode the NBG334S does not assign an IP address to your computer, so you should
check it’s in the same subnet. See Section 4.5 on page 66 for more information.
Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator
NBG334S User’s Guide
34
4 Type "1234" (default) as the password and click Login. In some versions, the default
password appears automatically - if this is the case, click Login.
5 You should see a screen asking you to change your password (highly recommended) as
shown next. Type a new password (and retype it to confirm) and click Apply or click
Ignore.
Figure 4 Change Password Screen
" The management session automatically times out when the time period set in
the Administrator Inactivity Timer field expires (default five minutes). Simply
log back into the NBG334S if this happens.
6 Select your language.
7 Select the setup mode you want to use.
• Click Go to Wizard Setup to use the Configuration Wizard for basic Internet and
Wireless setup.
• Click Go to Basic Setup if you want to view and configure basic settings that are not
part of the wizard setup. Not all Web Configurator screens are available in this mode.
See Chapter 21 on page 197 for more information.
Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator
NBG334S User’s Guide
35
Click Go to Advanced Setup to view and configure all the NBG334S’s settings.
• You can also configure your language settings in Maintenance > Language.
2.3 Resetting the NBG334S
If you forget your password or IP address, or you cannot access the web configurator, you will
need to use the RESET button at the back of the NBG334S to reload the factory-default
configuration file. This means that you will lose all configurations that you had previously
saved, the password will be reset to “1234” and the IP address will be reset to “192.168.1.1”.
2.3.1 Procedure to Use the Reset Button
1 Make sure the power LED is on.
2 Press the RESET button for five seconds or until the power LED begins to blink and
then release it. When the power LED begins to blink, the defaults have been restored and
the NBG334S restarts.
2.4 Navigating the Web Configurator
The following summarizes how to navigate the web configurator from the Status screen in
Router Mode and AP Mode.
2.5 The Status Screen in Router Mode
Click on Status. The screen below shows the status screen in Router Mode.
(For information on the status screen in AP Mode see Chapter 4 on page 62.)
Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator
NBG334S User’s Guide
36
Figure 5 Web Configurator Status Screen
The following table describes the icons shown in the Status screen.
The following table describes the labels shown in the Status screen.
Table 3 Status Screen Icon Key
ICON DESCRIPTION
Click this icon to open the setup wizard.
Click this icon to view copyright and a link for related product information.
Click this icon at any time to exit the web configurator.
Select a number of seconds or None from the drop-down list box to refresh all screen
statistics automatically at the end of every time interval or to not refresh the screen
statistics.
Click this button to refresh the status screen statistics.
Table 4 Web Configurator Status Screen
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Device Information
System Name This is the System Name you enter in the Maintenance > System > General
screen. It is for identification purposes.
Firmware Version This is the firmware version and the date created.
WAN Information
Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator
NBG334S User’s Guide
37
- MAC Address This shows the WAN Ethernet adapter MAC Address of your device.
- IP Address This shows the WAN port’s IP address.
- IP Subnet Mask This shows the WAN port’s subnet mask.
- DHCP This shows the WAN port’s DHCP role - Client or None.
LAN Information
- MAC Address This shows the LAN Ethernet adapter MAC Address of your device.
- IP Address This shows the LAN port’s IP address.
- IP Subnet Mask This shows the LAN port’s subnet mask.
- DHCP This shows the LAN port’s DHCP role - Server or None.
WLAN Information
- MAC Address This shows the wireless adapter MAC Address of your device.
- Name (SSID) This shows a descriptive name used to identify the NBG334S in the wireless LAN.
- Channel This shows the channel number which you select manually.
- Operating Channel This shows the channel number which the NBG334S is currently using over the
wireless LAN.
- Security Mode This shows the level of wireless security the NBG334S is using.
- 802.11 Mode This shows the wireless standard.
- Super G Mode This shows whether Super G is enabled or not.
System Status
System Up Time This is the total time the NBG334S has been on.
Current Date/Time This field displays your NBG334S’s present date and time.
System Resource
- CPU Usage This displays what percentage of the NBG334S’s processing ability is currently used.
When this percentage is close to 100%, the NBG334S is running at full load, and the
throughput is not going to improve anymore. If you want some applications to have
more throughput, you should turn off other applications (for example, using
bandwidth management.
- Memory Usage This shows what percentage of the heap memory the NBG334S is using. Heap
memory refers to the memory that is not used by ZyNOS (ZyXEL Network Operating
System) and is thus available for running processes like NAT and the firewall.
System Setting
- Firewall This shows whether the firewall is active or not.
- Bandwidth Management This shows whether the bandwidth management is active or not.
- UPnP This shows whether UPnP is active or not.
- Configuration Mode This shows whether the advanced screens of each feature are turned on
(Advanced) or not (Basic).
Interface Status
Interface This displays the NBG334S port types. The port types are: WAN, LAN and WLAN.
Status For the LAN and WAN ports, this field displays Down (line is down) or Up (line is up
or connected).
For the WLAN, it displays Up when the WLAN is enabled or Down when the WLAN
is disabled.
Table 4 Web Configurator Status Screen (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator
NBG334S User’s Guide
38
2.5.1 Navigation Panel
Use the sub-menus on the navigation panel to configure NBG334S features.
The following table describes the sub-menus.
Rate For the LAN ports, this displays the port speed and duplex setting or N/A when the
line is disconnected.
For the WAN port, it displays the port speed and duplex setting if you’re using
Ethernet encapsulation and Idle (line (ppp) idle), Dial (starting to trigger a call) and
Drop (dropping a call) if you're using PPPoE or PPTP encapsulation. This field
displays N/A when the line is disconnected.
For the WLAN, it displays the maximum transmission rate when the WLAN is
enabled and N/A when the WLAN is disabled.
Summary
Any IP Table Use this screen to view details of IP addresses assigned to devices not in the same
subnet as the NBG334S.
BW MGMT Monitor Use this screen to view the NBG334S’s bandwidth usage and allotments.
DHCP Table Use this screen to view current DHCP client information.
Packet Statistics Use this screen to view port status and packet specific statistics.
WLAN Station Status Use this screen to view the wireless stations that are currently associated to the
NBG334S.
Table 4 Web Configurator Status Screen (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 5 Screens Summary
LINK TAB FUNCTION
Status This screen shows the NBG334S’s general device, system and
interface status information. Use this screen to access the wizard,
and summary statistics tables.
Network
Wireless
LAN
General Use this screen to configure wireless LAN.
MAC Filter Use the MAC filter screen to configure the NBG334S to block
access to devices or block the devices from accessing the
NBG334S.
Advanced This screen allows you to configure advanced wireless settings.
QoS Use this screen to configure Wi-Fi Multimedia Quality of Service
(WMM QoS). WMM QoS allows you to prioritize wireless traffic
according to the delivery requirements of individual services.
WAN Internet
Connection
This screen allows you to configure ISP parameters, WAN IP
address assignment, DNS servers and the WAN MAC address.
Advanced Use this screen to configure other advanced properties.
LAN IP Use this screen to configure LAN IP address and subnet mask.
IP Alias Use this screen to partition your LAN interface into subnets.
Advanced Use this screen to enable other advanced properties.
Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator
NBG334S User’s Guide
39
DHCP
Server
General Use this screen to enable the NBG334S’s DHCP server.
Advanced Use this screen to assign IP addresses to specific individual
computers based on their MAC addresses and to have DNS
servers assigned by the DHCP server.
Client List Use this screen to view current DHCP client information and to
always assign an IP address to a MAC address (and host name).
NAT General Use this screen to enable NAT.
Application Use this screen to configure servers behind the NBG334S.
Advanced Use this screen to change your NBG334S’s port triggering settings.
DDNS General Use this screen to set up dynamic DNS.
Security
Firewall General Use this screen to activate/deactivate the firewall.
Services This screen shows a summary of the firewall rules, and allows you
to edit/add a firewall rule.
Content Filter Filter Use this screen to block certain web features and sites containing
certain keywords in the URL.
Schedule Use this screen to set the days and times for the NBG334S to
perform content filtering.
Management
Static Route IP Static
Route
Use this screen to configure IP static routes.
Bandwidth
MGMT
General Use this screen to enable bandwidth management.
Advanced Use this screen to set the upstream bandwidth and edit a
bandwidth management rule.
Monitor Use this screen to view the NBG334S’s bandwidth usage and
allotments.
Remote
MGMT
WWW Use this screen to configure through which interface(s) and from
which IP address(es) users can use HTTP to manage the
NBG334S.
Telnet Use this screen to configure through which interface(s) and from
which IP address(es) users can use Telnet to manage the
NBG334S.
FTP Use this screen to configure through which interface(s) and from
which IP address(es) users can use FTP to access the NBG334S.
DNS Use this screen to configure through which interface(s) and from
which IP address(es) users can send DNS queries to the
NBG334S.
UPnP General Use this screen to enable UPnP on the NBG334S.
Maintenance
System General Use this screen to view and change administrative settings such as
system and domain names, password and inactivity timer.
Time Setting Use this screen to change your NBG334S’s time and date.
Logs View Log Use this screen to view the logs for the categories that you
selected.
Log Settings Use this screen to change your NBG334S’s log settings.
Table 5 Screens Summary
LINK TAB FUNCTION
Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator
NBG334S User’s Guide
40
2.5.2 Summary: Any IP Table
This screen displays the IP address of each computer that is using the NBG334S via the any IP
feature. Any IP allows computers to access the Internet through the NBG334S without
changing their network settings when NAT is enabled. To access this screen, open the Status
screen (see Section 2.5 on page 35), and click (Details...) next to Any IP Table.
Figure 6 Any IP Table
2.5.3 Summary: Bandwidth Management Monitor
Select the BW MGMT Monitor (Details...) hyperlink in Status screen. View the bandwidth
usage of the WAN configured bandwidth rules. This is also shown as bandwidth usage over
the bandwidth budget for each rule. The gray section of the bar represents the percentage of
unused bandwidth and the blue color represents the percentage of bandwidth in use.
Figure 7 Summary: BW MGMT Monitor
To o l s Firmware Use this screen to upload firmware to your NBG334S.
Configuration Use this screen to backup and restore the configuration or reset
the factory defaults to your NBG334S.
Restart This screen allows you to reboot the NBG334S without turning the
power off.
Config Mode General This screen allows you to display or hide the advanced screens or
features.
Sys OP
Mode
General This screen allows you to select whether your device acts as a
Router or a Access Point.
Language Language This screen allows you to change the language the web
configurator uses
Table 5 Screens Summary
LINK TAB FUNCTION
Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator
NBG334S User’s Guide
41
2.5.4 Summary: DHCP Table
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual
clients to obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. You can configure the
NBG334S as a DHCP server or disable it. When configured as a server, the NBG334S
provides the TCP/IP configuration for the clients. If DHCP service is disabled, you must have
another DHCP server on your LAN, or else the computer must be manually configured.
Click the DHCP Table (Details...) hyperlink in the Status screen. Read-only information here
relates to your DHCP status. The DHCP table shows current DHCP client information
(including IP Address, Host Name and MAC Address) of all network clients using the
NBG334S’s DHCP server.
Figure 8 Summary: DHCP Table
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
2.5.5 Summary: Packet Statistics
Click the Packet Statistics (Details...) hyperlink in the Status screen. Read-only information
here includes port status, packet specific statistics and the "system up time". The Poll
Interval(s) field is configurable and is used for refreshing the screen.
Table 6 Summary: DHCP Table
LABEL DESCRIPTION
# This is the index number of the host computer.
IP Address This field displays the IP address relative to the # field listed above.
Host Name This field displays the computer host name.
MAC Address This field shows the MAC address of the computer with the name in the Host Name
field.
Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address which
uniquely identifies a device. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists
of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02.
Refresh Click Refresh to renew the screen.
Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator
NBG334S User’s Guide
42
Figure 9 Summary: Packet Statistics
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
2.5.6 Summary: Wireless Station Status
Click the WLAN Station Status (Details...) hyperlink in the Status screen. View the wireless
stations that are currently associated to the NBG334S in the Association List screen.
Association means that a wireless client (for example, your network or computer with a
wireless network card) has connected successfully to the AP (or wireless router) using the
same SSID, channel and security settings.
Table 7 Summary: Packet Statistics
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port This is the NBG334S’s port type.
Status For the LAN ports, this displays the port speed and duplex setting or Down
when the line is disconnected.
For the WAN port, it displays the port speed and duplex setting if you’re using
Ethernet encapsulation and Idle (line (ppp) idle), Dial (starting to trigger a call)
and Drop (dropping a call) if you're using PPPoE or PPTP encapsulation. This
field displays Down when the line is disconnected.
For the WLAN, it displays the maximum transmission rate when the WLAN is
enabled and Down when the WLAN is disabled.
TxPkts This is the number of transmitted packets on this port.
RxPkts This is the number of received packets on this port.
Collisions This is the number of collisions on this port.
Tx B/s This displays the transmission speed in bytes per second on this port.
Rx B/s This displays the reception speed in bytes per second on this port.
Up Time This is the total amount of time the line has been up.
System Up Time This is the total time the NBG334S has been on.
Poll Interval(s) Enter the time interval for refreshing statistics in this field.
Set Interval Click this button to apply the new poll interval you entered in the Poll Interval(s)
field.
Stop Click Stop to stop refreshing statistics.
Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator
NBG334S User’s Guide
43
Figure 10 Summary: Wireless Association List
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 8 Summary: Wireless Association List
LABEL DESCRIPTION
# This is the index number of an associated wireless station.
MAC Address This field displays the MAC address of an associated wireless station.
Association Time This field displays the time a wireless station first associated with the NBG334S.
Refresh Click Refresh to reload the list.
Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator
NBG334S User’s Guide
44
NBG334S User’s Guide
45
CHAPTER 3
Connection Wizard
This chapter provides information on the wizard setup screens in the web configurator.
3.1 Wizard Setup
The web configurator’s wizard setup helps you configure your device to access the Internet.
Refer to your ISP (Internet Service Provider) checklist in the Quick Start Guide to know what
to enter in each field. Leave a field blank if you don’t have that information.
1 After you access the NBG334S web configurator, choose your language.
2 To begin the wizard, click the Go to Wizard setup hyperlink.
You can click the Go to Basic setup or Go to Advanced setup hyperlink to skip this
wizard setup and configure basic or advanced features accordingly.
Figure 11 Select Wizard or Advanced Mode
3 The wizard welcome screen appears. Select your language again if you need to and click
Next.
Chapter 3 Connection Wizard
NBG334S User’s Guide
46
Figure 12 Select a Language
4 Read the on-screen information and click Next.
Figure 13 Welcome to the Connection Wizard
3.2 Connection Wizard: STEP 1: System Information
System Information contains administrative and system-related information.
3.2.1 System Name
System Name is for identification purposes. However, because some ISPs check this name
you should enter your computer's "Computer Name".
• In Windows 95/98 click Start, Settings, Control Panel, Network. Click the
Identification tab, note the entry for the Computer Name field and enter it as the System
Name.
• In Windows 2000, click Start, Settings and Control Panel and then double-click System.
Click the Network Identification tab and then the Properties button. Note the entry for
the Computer name field and enter it as the System Name.
• In Windows XP, click Start, My Computer, View system information and then click
the Computer Name tab. Note the entry in the Full computer name field and enter it as
the NBG334S System Name.
Chapter 3 Connection Wizard
NBG334S User’s Guide
47
3.2.2 Domain Name
The Domain Name entry is what is propagated to the DHCP clients on the LAN. If you leave
this blank, the domain name obtained by DHCP from the ISP is used. While you must enter
the host name (System Name) on each individual computer, the domain name can be assigned
from the NBG334S via DHCP.
Click Next to configure the NBG334S for Internet access.
Figure 14 Wizard Step 1: System Information
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
3.3 Connection Wizard: STEP 2: Wireless LAN
Set up your wireless LAN using the following screen.
Table 9 Wizard Step 1: System Information
LABEL DESCRIPTION
System Name System Name is a unique name to identify the NBG334S in an Ethernet network.
Enter a descriptive name. This name can be up to 30 alphanumeric characters long.
Spaces are not allowed, but dashes "-" and underscores "_" are accepted.
Domain Name Type the domain name (if you know it) here. If you leave this field blank, the ISP may
assign a domain name via DHCP. The domain name entered by you is given priority
over the ISP assigned domain name.
Back Click Back to display the previous screen.
Next Click Next to proceed to the next screen.
Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving.
Chapter 3 Connection Wizard
NBG334S User’s Guide
48
Figure 15 Wizard Step 2: Wireless LAN
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
" The wireless stations and NBG334S must use the same SSID, channel ID and
WEP encryption key (if WEP is enabled), WPA-PSK (if WPA-PSK is enabled)
or WPA2-PSK (if WPA2-PSK is enabled) for wireless communication.
Table 10 Wizard Step 2: Wireless LAN
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Name (SSID) Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 printable 7-bit ASCII characters) for the wireless
LAN.
If you change this field on the NBG334S, make sure all wireless stations use the same
SSID in order to access the network.
Security Select a Security level from the drop-down list box.
Choose Auto to have the NBG334S generate a pre-shared key automatically. A
screen pops up displaying the generated pre-shared key after you click Next. Write
down the key for use later when connecting other wireless devices to your network.
Click OK to continue.
Choose None to have no wireless LAN security configured. If you do not enable any
wireless security on your NBG334S, your network is accessible to any wireless
networking device that is within range. If you choose this option, skip directly to
Section 3.4 on page 50.
Choose Basic (WEP) security if you want to configure WEP Encryption parameters. If
you choose this option, go directly to Section 3.3.1 on page 49.
Choose Extend (WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK) security to configure a Pre-Shared Key.
Choose this option only if your wireless clients support WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK
respectively. If you choose this option, skip directly to Section 3.3.2 on page 50.
Channel
Selection
The range of radio frequencies used by IEEE 802.11b/g wireless devices is called a
channel.
Select a channel that is not used by any nearby devices.
Back Click Back to display the previous screen.
Next Click Next to proceed to the next screen.
Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving.
Chapter 3 Connection Wizard
NBG334S User’s Guide
49
3.3.1 Basic (WEP) Security
Choose Basic (WEP) to setup WEP Encryption parameters.
Figure 16 Wizard Step 2: Basic (WEP) Security
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 11 Wizard Step 2: Basic (WEP) Security
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Passphrase Type a Passphrase (up to 32 printable characters) and click Generate. The NBG334S
automatically generates a WEP key.
WEP
Encryption
Select 64-bit WEP or 128-bit WEP to allow data encryption.
ASCII Select this option in order to enter ASCII characters as the WEP keys.
HEX Select this option to enter hexadecimal characters as the WEP keys.
The preceding “0x” is entered automatically.
Key 1 to Key 4 The WEP keys are used to encrypt data. Both the NBG334S and the wireless stations
must use the same WEP key for data transmission.
If you chose 64-bit WEP, then enter any 5 ASCII characters or 10 hexadecimal
characters ("0-9", "A-F").
If you chose 128-bit WEP, then enter 13 ASCII characters or 26 hexadecimal
characters ("0-9", "A-F").
You must configure at least one key, only one key can be activated at any one time.
The default key is key 1.
Back Click Back to display the previous screen.
Chapter 3 Connection Wizard
NBG334S User’s Guide
50
3.3.2 Extend (WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK) Security
Choose Extend (WPA-PSK) or Extend (WPA2-PSK) security in the Wireless LAN setup
screen to set up a Pre-Shared Key.
Figure 17 Wizard Step 2: Extend (WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK) Security
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
3.4 Connection Wizard: STEP 3: Internet Configuration
The NBG334S offers three Internet connection types. They are Ethernet, PPP over Ethernet
or PPTP. The wizard attempts to detect which WAN connection type you are using. If the
wizard does not detect a connection type, you must select one from the drop-down list box.
Check with your ISP to make sure you use the correct type.
This wizard screen varies according to the connection type that you select.
Next Click Next to proceed to the next screen.
Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving.
Table 11 Wizard Step 2: Basic (WEP) Security
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 12 Wizard Step 2: Extend (WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK) Security
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Pre-Shared
Key
Type from 8 to 63 case-sensitive ASCII characters. You can set up the most secure
wireless connection by configuring WPA in the wireless LAN screens. You need to
configure an authentication server to do this.
Back Click Back to display the previous screen.
Next Click Next to proceed to the next screen.
Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving.
Chapter 3 Connection Wizard
NBG334S User’s Guide
51
Figure 18 Wizard Step 3: ISP Parameters.
The following table describes the labels in this screen,
3.4.1 Ethernet Connection
Choose Ethernet when the WAN port is used as a regular Ethernet.
Figure 19 Wizard Step 3: Ethernet Connection
3.4.2 PPPoE Connection
Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE) functions as a dial-up connection. PPPoE is an
IETF (Internet Engineering Task Force) standard specifying how a host personal computer
interacts with a broadband modem (for example DSL, cable, wireless, etc.) to achieve access
to high-speed data networks.
For the service provider, PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that works with
existing access control systems (for instance, RADIUS).
Table 13 Wizard Step 3: ISP Parameters
CONNECTION TYPE DESCRIPTION
Ethernet Select the Ethernet option when the WAN port is used as a regular Ethernet.
PPPoE
Select the PPP over Ethernet option for a dial-up connection. If your ISP
gave you a an IP address and/or subnet mask, then select PPTP.
PPTP Select the PPTP option for a dial-up connection.
Chapter 3 Connection Wizard
NBG334S User’s Guide
52
One of the benefits of PPPoE is the ability to let end users access one of multiple network
services, a function known as dynamic service selection. This enables the service provider to
easily create and offer new IP services for specific users.
Operationally, PPPoE saves significant effort for both the subscriber and the ISP/carrier, as it
requires no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the subscriber’s site.
By implementing PPPoE directly on the NBG334S (rather than individual computers), the
computers on the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed, since the NBG334S does that
part of the task. Furthermore, with NAT, all of the LAN's computers will have Internet access.
Refer to the appendix for more information on PPPoE.
Figure 20 Wizard Step 3: PPPoE Connection
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
3.4.3 PPTP Connection
Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP) is a network protocol that enables transfers of data
from a remote client to a private server, creating a Virtual Private Network (VPN) using TCP/
IP-based networks.
PPTP supports on-demand, multi-protocol, and virtual private networking over public
networks, such as the Internet.
Refer to the appendix for more information on PPTP.
Table 14 Wizard Step 3: PPPoE Connection
LABEL DESCRIPTION
ISP Parameter for Internet Access
Connection Type
Select the PPP over Ethernet option for a dial-up connection.
Service Name Type the name of your service provider.
User Name Type the user name given to you by your ISP.
Password Type the password associated with the user name above.
Back Click Back to return to the previous screen.
Next Click Next to continue.
Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving.
Chapter 3 Connection Wizard
NBG334S User’s Guide
53
" The NBG334S supports one PPTP server connection at any given time.
Figure 21 Wizard Step 3: PPTP Connection
The following table describes the fields in this screen
Table 15 Wizard Step 3: PPTP Connection
LABEL DESCRIPTION
ISP Parameters for Internet Access
Connection Type Select PPTP from the drop-down list box. To configure a PPTP client, you must
configure the User Name and Password fields for a PPP connection and the
PPTP parameters for a PPTP connection.
User Name Type the user name given to you by your ISP.
Password Type the password associated with the User Name above.
PPTP Configuration
Get automatically
from ISP
Select this radio button if your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address.
Use fixed IP
address
Select this radio button, provided by your ISP to give the NBG334S a fixed,
unique IP address.
My IP Address Type the (static) IP address assigned to you by your ISP.
My IP Subnet
Mask
Type the subnet mask assigned to you by your ISP (if given).
Server IP Address Type the IP address of the PPTP server.
Connection ID/
Name
Enter the connection ID or connection name in this field. It must follow the "c:id"
and "n:name" format. For example, C:12 or N:My ISP.
This field is optional and depends on the requirements of your ISP.
Back Click Back to return to the previous screen.
Chapter 3 Connection Wizard
NBG334S User’s Guide
54
3.4.4 Your IP Address
The following wizard screen allows you to assign a fixed IP address or give the NBG334S an
automatically assigned IP address depending on your ISP.
Figure 22 Wizard Step 3: Your IP Address
The following table describes the labels in this screen
3.4.5 WAN IP Address Assignment
Every computer on the Internet must have a unique IP address. If your networks are isolated
from the Internet, for instance, only between your two branch offices, you can assign any IP
addresses to the hosts without problems. However, the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority
(IANA) has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private
networks.
Next Click Next to continue.
Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving.
Table 15 Wizard Step 3: PPTP Connection
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 16 Wizard Step 3: Your IP Address
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Get automatically from
your ISP
Select this option If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address. This is
the default selection. If you choose this option, skip directly to section
3.4.9.
Use fixed IP address
provided by your ISP
Select this option if you were given IP address and/or DNS server settings
by the ISP. The fixed IP address should be in the same subnet as your
broadband modem or router.
Back Click Back to return to the previous screen.
Next Click Next to continue.
Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving.
Table 17 Private IP Address Ranges
10.0.0.0 - 10.255.255.255
172.16.0.0 - 172.31.255.255
192.168.0.0 - 192.168.255.255
Chapter 3 Connection Wizard
NBG334S User’s Guide
55
You can obtain your IP address from the IANA, from an ISP or have it assigned by a private
network. If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP, the
ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks. On the other hand, if
you are part of a much larger organization, you should consult your network administrator for
the appropriate IP addresses.
" Regardless of your particular situation, do not create an arbitrary IP address;
always follow the guidelines above. For more information on address
assignment, please refer to RFC 1597, Address Allocation for Private Internets
and RFC 1466, Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space.
3.4.6 IP Address and Subnet Mask
Similar to the way houses on a street share a common street name, so too do computers on a
LAN share one common network number.
Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation. If the ISP or
your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses, follow their
instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask.
If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number, then most likely you have a single
user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is
established. The Internet Assigned Number Authority (IANA) reserved this block of addresses
specifically for private use; please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise.
Let's say you select 192.168.1.0 as the network number; which covers 254 individual
addresses, from 192.168.1.1 to 192.168.1.254 (zero and 255 are reserved). In other words, the
first three numbers specify the network number while the last number identifies an individual
computer on that network.
Once you have decided on the network number, pick an IP address that is easy to remember,
for instance, 192.168.1.1, for your NBG334S, but make sure that no other device on your
network is using that IP address.
The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your NBG334S will
compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered. You don't
need to change the subnet mask computed by the NBG334S unless you are instructed to do
otherwise.
3.4.7 DNS Server Address Assignment
Use DNS (Domain Name System) to map a domain name to its corresponding IP address and
vice versa, for instance, the IP address of www.zyxel.com is 204.217.0.2. The DNS server is
extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a computer before
you can access it.
The NBG334S can get the DNS server addresses in the following ways.
1 The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses, usually in the form of an information sheet,
when you sign up. If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses, enter them in the DNS
Server fields in the Wizard and/or WAN > Internet Connection screen.
Chapter 3 Connection Wizard
NBG334S User’s Guide
56
2 If the ISP did not give you DNS server information, leave the DNS Server fields set to
0.0.0.0 in the Wizard screen and/or set to From ISP in the WAN > Internet
Connection screen for the ISP to dynamically assign the DNS server IP addresses.
3.4.8 WAN IP and DNS Server Address Assignment
The following wizard screen allows you to assign a fixed WAN IP address and DNS server
addresses.
Figure 23 Wizard Step 3: WAN IP and DNS Server Addresses
The following table describes the labels in this screen
Table 18 Wizard Step 3: WAN IP and DNS Server Addresses
LABEL DESCRIPTION
WAN IP Address Assignment
My WAN IP Address Enter your WAN IP address in this field. The WAN IP address should be in
the same subnet as your DSL/Cable modem or router.
My WAN IP Subnet Mask Enter the IP subnet mask in this field.
Gateway IP Address Enter the gateway IP address in this field.
System DNS Server Address Assignment (if applicable)
DNS (Domain Name System) is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice
versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a
computer before you can access it. The NBG334S uses a system DNS server (in the order you specify
here) to resolve domain names for DDNS and the time server.
First DNS Server
Second DNS Server
Third DNS Server
Enter the DNS server's IP address in the fields provided.
If you do not configure a system DNS server, you must use IP addresses
when configuring DDNS and the time server.
Back Click Back to return to the previous screen.
Next Click Next to continue.
Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving.
Chapter 3 Connection Wizard
NBG334S User’s Guide
57
3.4.9 WAN MAC Address
Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address
is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example,
00:A0:C5:00:00:02.
This screen allows users to configure the WAN port's MAC address by either using the
NBG334S’s MAC address, copying the MAC address from a computer on your LAN or
manually entering a MAC address. Once it is successfully configured, the address will be
copied to the "rom" file (ZyNOS configuration file). It will not change unless you change the
setting or upload a different "rom" file. It is advisable to clone the MAC address from a
computer on your LAN even if your ISP does not presently require MAC address
authentication.
Figure 24 Wizard Step 3: WAN MAC Address
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 19 Example of Network Properties for LAN Servers with Fixed IP Addresses
Choose an IP address 192.168.1.2-192.168.1.32; 192.168.1.65-192.168.1.254.
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0
Gateway (or default route) 192.168.1.1(NBG334S LAN IP)
Table 20 Wizard Step 3: WAN MAC Address
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Factory Default Select Factory Default to use the factory assigned default MAC address.
Clone the
computer’s MAC
address
Select this option and enter the IP address of the computer on the LAN whose
MAC you are cloning. It is advisable to clone the MAC address from a computer
on your LAN even if your ISP does not presently require MAC address
authentication.
Set WAN MAC
Address
Select this option and enter the MAC address you want to use.
Back Click Back to return to the previous screen.
Next Click Next to continue.
Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving.
Chapter 3 Connection Wizard
NBG334S User’s Guide
58
3.5 Connection Wizard: STEP 4: Bandwidth management
Bandwidth management allows you to control the amount of bandwidth going out through the
NBG334S’s WAN, LAN or WLAN port and prioritize the distribution of the bandwidth
according to the traffic type. This helps keep one service from using all of the available
bandwidth and shutting out other users.
Figure 25 Wizard Step 4: Bandwidth Management
The following fields describe the label in this screen.
3.6 Connection Wizard Complete
Click Apply to save your configuration.
Table 21 Wizard Step 4: Bandwidth Management
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Enable BM for all traffic
automatically
Select the check box to have the NBG334S apply bandwidth management
to traffic going out through the NBG334S’s WAN, LAN, HomePlug AV or
WLAN port. Bandwidth is allocated according to the traffic type
automatically. Real-time packets, such as VoIP traffic always get higher
priority.
Back Click Back to return to the previous screen.
Next Click Next to continue.
Exit Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving.
Chapter 3 Connection Wizard
NBG334S User’s Guide
59
Figure 26 Connection Wizard Save
Follow the on-screen instructions and click Finish to complete the wizard setup.
Figure 27 Connection Wizard Complete
Well done! You have successfully set up your NBG334S to operate on your network and
access the Internet.
Chapter 3 Connection Wizard
NBG334S User’s Guide
60
NBG334S User’s Guide
61
CHAPTER 4
AP Mode
This chapter discusses how to configure settings while your NBG334S is set to AP Mode.
Many screens that are available in Router Mode are not available in AP Mode.
" See Chapter 6 on page 89 for an example of setting up a wireless network in
AP mode.
4.1 AP Mode Overview
Use your NBG334S as an AP if you already have a router or gateway on your network. In this
mode your device bridges a wired network (LAN) and wireless LAN (WLAN) in the same
subnet. See the figure below for an example.
Figure 28 Wireless Internet Access in AP Mode
4.2 Setting your NBG334S to AP Mode
1 Log into the web configurator if you haven’t already. See the Quick start Guide for
instructions on how to do this.
2 To set your NBG334S to AP Mode, go to Maintenance > Sys OP Mode > General and
select Access Point.
Chapter 4 AP Mode
NBG334S User’s Guide
62
Figure 29 Maintenance > Sys OP Mode > General
3 A pop-up appears providing information on this mode. Click OK in the pop-up message
window. (See Section 22.2 on page 200 for more information on the pop-up.) Click
Apply. Your NBG334S is now in AP Mode.
" You do not have to log in again or restart your device when you change
modes.
4.3 The Status Screen in AP Mode
Click on Status. The screen below shows the status screen in AP Mode.
Figure 30 Status: AP Mode
Chapter 4 AP Mode
NBG334S User’s Guide
63
The following table describes the labels shown in the Status screen.
Table 22 Web Configurator Status Screen
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Device Information
System Name This is the System Name you enter in the Maintenance > System > General
screen. It is for identification purposes.
Firmware Version This is the firmware version and the date created.
LAN Information
- MAC Address This shows the LAN Ethernet adapter MAC Address of your device.
- IP Address This shows the LAN port’s IP address.
- IP Subnet Mask This shows the LAN port’s subnet mask.
- DHCP This shows the LAN port’s DHCP role - Client or None.
WLAN Information
- MAC Address This shows the wireless adapter MAC Address of your device.
- Name (SSID) This shows a descriptive name used to identify the NBG334S in the wireless LAN.
- Channel This shows the channel number which you select manually.
- Operating Channel This shows the channel number which the NBG334S is currently using over the
wireless LAN.
- Security Mode This shows the level of wireless security the NBG334S is using.
- 802.11 Mode This shows the IEEE 802.11 standard that the NBG334S supports. Wireless clients
must support the same standard in order to be able to connect to the NBG334S
- Super G Mode This shows whether Super G is enabled or not.
System Status
System Uptime This is the total time the NBG334S has been on.
Current Date/Time This field displays your NBG334S’s present date and time.
System Resource
- CPU Usage This displays what percentage of the NBG334S’s processing ability is currently used.
When this percentage is close to 100%, the NBG334S is running at full load, and the
throughput is not going to improve anymore. If you want some applications to have
more throughput, you should turn off other applications (for example, using
bandwidth management.
- Memory Usage This shows what percentage of the heap memory the NBG334S is using. Heap
memory refers to the memory that is not used by ZyNOS (ZyXEL Network Operating
System) and is thus available for running processes like NAT and the firewall.
System Setting
- Configuration Mode This shows whether the advanced screens of each feature are turned on
(Advanced) or not (Basic).
- System Operation Mode This shows whether the system is configured to connect to the Internet in Router
Mode or Access Point Mode.
Interface Status
Interface This displays the NBG334S port types. The port types are: LAN and WLAN.
Status For the LAN port, this field displays Down (line is down) or Up (line is up or
connected).
For the WLAN, it displays Up when the WLAN is enabled or Down when the WLAN
is disabled.
Chapter 4 AP Mode
NBG334S User’s Guide
64
4.3.1 Navigation Panel
Use the menu in the navigation panel to configure NBG334S features in AP Mode.
The following screen and table show the features you can configure in AP Mode.
Figure 31 Menu: AP Mode
The following table describes the sub-menus.
Rate For the LAN ports, this displays the port speed and duplex setting or N/A when the
line is disconnected.
For the WLAN, it displays the maximum transmission rate when the WLAN is
enabled and N/A when the WLAN is disabled.
Summary
Any IP Table Use this screen to view details of IP addresses assigned to devices not in the same
subnet as the NBG334S.
Packet Statistics Use this screen to view port status and packet specific statistics.
WLAN Station Status Use this screen to view the wireless stations that are currently associated to the
NBG334S.
Table 22 Web Configurator Status Screen (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 23 Screens Summary
LINK TAB FUNCTION
Status This screen shows the NBG334S’s general device, system and
interface status information. Use this screen to access the wizard,
and summary statistics tables.
Network
Wireless
LAN
General Use this screen to configure wireless LAN.
MAC Filter Use the MAC filter screen to configure the NBG334S to block
access to devices or block the devices from accessing the
NBG334S.
Advanced This screen allows you to configure advanced wireless settings.
QoS Use this screen to configure Wi-Fi Multimedia Quality of Service
(WMM QoS). WMM QoS allows you to prioritize wireless traffic
according to the delivery requirements of individual services.
Chapter 4 AP Mode
NBG334S User’s Guide
65
4.4 Configuring Your Settings
4.4.1 LAN Settings
Use this section to configure your LAN settings while in AP Mode.
Click Network > LAN to see the screen below.
" If you change the IP address of the NBG334S in the screen below, you will
need to log into the NBG334S again using the new IP address.
Figure 32 Network > LAN > IP
LAN IP Use this screen to configure LAN IP address and subnet mask or to
get the LAN IP address from a DHCP server.
Maintenance
System General Use this screen to view and change administrative settings such as
system and domain names, password and inactivity timer.
Time Setting Use this screen to change your NBG334S’s time and date.
Logs View Log Use this screen to view the logs for the categories that you
selected.
Log Settings Use this screen to change your NBG334S’s log settings.
To o l s Firmware Use this screen to upload firmware to your NBG334S.
Configuration Use this screen to backup and restore the configuration or reset
the factory defaults to your NBG334S.
Restart This screen allows you to reboot the NBG334S without turning the
power off.
Config Mode General This screen allows you to display or hide the advanced screens or
features.
Sys OP
Mode
General This screen allows you to select whether your device acts as a
Router or a Access Point.
Language Language This screen allows you to change the language the web
configurator uses.
Table 23 Screens Summary
LINK TAB FUNCTION
Chapter 4 AP Mode
NBG334S User’s Guide
66
The table below describes the labels in the screen.
Table 24 Network > LAN > IP
4.4.2 WLAN and Maintenance Settings
The configuration of wireless and maintenance settings in AP Mode is the same as for Router
Mode.
• See Chapter 5 on page 69 for information on the configuring your wireless network.
• See Maintenance and Troubleshooting (171) for information on the configuring your
Maintenance settings.
4.5 Logging in to the Web Configurator in AP Mode
1 Connect your computer to the LAN port of the NBG334S.
2 The default IP address if the NBG334S is “192.168.1.1”. In this case, your computer
must have an IP address in the range between “192.168.1.2” and “192.168.1.255”.
3 Click Start > Run on your computer in Windows.
4 Type “cmd” in the dialog box.
5 Type “ipconfig” to show your computer’s IP address. If your computer’s IP address is
not in the correct range then see Appendix D on page 231 for information on changing
your computer’s IP address.
6 After you’ve set your computer’s IP address, open a web browser such as Internet
Explorer and type “192.168.1.1” as the web address in your web browser.
See Chapter 6 on page 89 for a tutorial on setting up a network with an AP.
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Get form
DHCP Server
Select this option to allow the NBG334S to obtain an IP address from a DHCP server
on the network. You must connect the WAN port to a device with a DHCP server
enabled (such as a router or gateway). Without a DHCP server the NBG334S will
have no IP address. You need to find out the IP address the DHCP server assigns to
the NBG334S and use that address to log in to the NBG334S again.
User Defined
LAN IP
Select this option to set the NBG334S’s IP address. This setting is selected by
default. Check the IP address is on the same domain as other devices on your
network.
IP Address Type the IP address in dotted decimal notation. The default setting is 192.168.1.1. If
you change the IP address you will have to log in again with the new IP address.
IP Subnet
Mask
The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your
NBG334S will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address that
you assign. Unless you are implementing subnetting, use the subnet mask computed
by the NBG334S.
Gateway IP
Address
Type the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is an immediate neighbor of your
NBG334S that will forward the packet to the destination. In AP Mode, the gateway
must be a router on the same segment as your NBG334S.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the NBG334S.
Reset Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen.
67
PART II
Network
Wireless LAN (69)
Wireless Tutorial (89)
WA N ( 93 )
LAN (103)
DHCP (109)
Network Address Translation (NAT) (113)
Dynamic DNS (123)
68
NBG334S User’s Guide
69
CHAPTER 5
Wireless LAN
This chapter discusses how to configure the wireless network settings in your NBG334S. See
the appendices for more detailed information about wireless networks.
5.1 Wireless Network Overview
The following figure provides an example of a wireless network.
Figure 33 Example of a Wireless Network
The wireless network is the part in the blue circle. In this wireless network, devices A and B
are called wireless clients. The wireless clients use the access point (AP) to interact with other
devices (such as the printer) or with the Internet. Your NBG334S is the AP.
Every wireless network must follow these basic guidelines.
• Every wireless client in the same wireless network must use the same SSID.
The SSID is the name of the wireless network. It stands for Service Set IDentity.
• If two wireless networks overlap, they should use different channels.
Like radio stations or television channels, each wireless network uses a specific channel,
or frequency, to send and receive information.
Chapter 5 Wireless LAN
NBG334S User’s Guide
70
• Every wireless client in the same wireless network must use security compatible with the
AP.
Security stops unauthorized devices from using the wireless network. It can also protect
the information that is sent in the wireless network.
Requirements
To add a wireless LAN to your existing network, make sure you have the following:
1 an access point (AP) or a router with the wireless feature
2 at least one wireless network card/adapter which varies according to your computer.
•If you have a desktop, use either a wireless USB adapter or a wireless PCI adapter.
•If you have a laptop, use either a wireless USB adapter or a wireless CardBus card.
3 a RADIUS server only if you want to use IEEE802.1x, WPA or WPA2
To have two or more computers communicate with each other wirelessly without an AP or
wireless router, make sure you have the following:
1 two or more wireless network cards/adapters which vary according to your computers.
•If you have a desktop, use either a wireless USB adapter or a wireless PCI adapter.
•If you have a laptop, use either a wireless USB adapter or a wireless CardBus card.
Setup Information
To set up your wireless network using an AP or wireless router, make sure your AP or wireless
router and wireless network card(s)/adapter(s) use the same following settings:
• SSID:_____________________
• Channel: auto or _________
• Network type of a wireless network card/adapter: Infrastructure
• wireless standard: IEEE 802.11b, g, b/g or a
• Security:
( ) None
( ) WEP (64bit, 128bit or 256bit key) (ASCII or Hex):________________
( ) IEEE 802.1x
( ) WPA-PSK (TKIP or AES):_______________
( ) WPA (TKIP or AES)
( ) WPA2-PSK (TKIP or AES):______________
( ) WPA2 (TKIP or AES)
Chapter 5 Wireless LAN
NBG334S User’s Guide
71
• Preamble type (if available): auto, short or long
To set up your wireless network without an AP or wireless router, make sure wireless network
cards/adapters use the same following settings:
• Network type: Ad-Hoc
• SSID:_____________________
• Channel: _________________
• wireless standard: IEEE 802.11b, g, b/g or a
• Security:
( ) None
( ) WEP (64bit, 128bit or 256bit key) (ASCII or Hex):________________
5.2 Wireless Security Overview
The following sections introduce different types of wireless security you can set up in the
wireless network.
5.2.1 SSID
Normally, the AP acts like a beacon and regularly broadcasts the SSID in the area. You can
hide the SSID instead, in which case the AP does not broadcast the SSID. In addition, you
should change the default SSID to something that is difficult to guess.
This type of security is fairly weak, however, because there are ways for unauthorized devices
to get the SSID. In addition, unauthorized devices can still see the information that is sent in
the wireless network.
5.2.2 MAC Address Filter
Every wireless client has a unique identification number, called a MAC address.
1
A MAC
address is usually written using twelve hexadecimal characters
2
; for example, 00A0C5000002
or 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. To get the MAC address for each wireless client, see the appropriate
User’s Guide or other documentation.
You can use the MAC address filter to tell the AP which wireless clients are allowed or not
allowed to use the wireless network. If a wireless client is allowed to use the wireless network,
it still has to have the correct settings (SSID, channel, and security). If a wireless client is not
allowed to use the wireless network, it does not matter if it has the correct settings.
This type of security does not protect the information that is sent in the wireless network.
Furthermore, there are ways for unauthorized devices to get the MAC address of an authorized
wireless client. Then, they can use that MAC address to use the wireless network.
1. Some wireless devices, such as scanners, can detect wireless networks but cannot use wireless networks.
These kinds of wireless devices might not have MAC addresses.
2. Hexadecimal characters are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A, B, C, D, E, and F.
Chapter 5 Wireless LAN
NBG334S User’s Guide
72
5.2.3 User Authentication
You can make every user log in to the wireless network before they can use it. This is called
user authentication. However, every wireless client in the wireless network has to support
IEEE 802.1x to do this.
For wireless networks, there are two typical places to store the user names and passwords for
each user.
• In the AP: this feature is called a local user database or a local database.
• In a RADIUS server: this is a server used in businesses more than in homes.
If your AP does not provide a local user database and if you do not have a RADIUS server,
you cannot set up user names and passwords for your users.
Unauthorized devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network, even if
they cannot use the wireless network. Furthermore, there are ways for unauthorized wireless
users to get a valid user name and password. Then, they can use that user name and password
to use the wireless network.
Local user databases also have an additional limitation that is explained in the next section.
5.2.4 Encryption
Wireless networks can use encryption to protect the information that is sent in the wireless
network. Encryption is like a secret code. If you do not know the secret code, you cannot
understand the message.
The types of encryption you can choose depend on the type of user authentication. (See
Section 5.2.3 on page 72 for information about this.)
For example, if the wireless network has a RADIUS server, you can choose WPA or WPA2.
If users do not log in to the wireless network, you can choose no encryption, Static WEP,
WPA-PSK, or WPA2-PSK.
Usually, you should set up the strongest encryption that every wireless client in the wireless
network supports. For example, suppose the AP does not have a local user database, and you
do not have a RADIUS server. Therefore, there is no user authentication. Suppose the wireless
network has two wireless clients. Device A only supports WEP, and device B supports WEP
and WPA. Therefore, you should set up Static WEP in the wireless network.
Table 25 Types of Encryption for Each Type of Authentication
NO AUTHENTICATION RADIUS SERVER
Weakest No Security WPA
Static WEP
WPA-PSK
Strongest WPA2-PSK WPA2
Chapter 5 Wireless LAN
NBG334S User’s Guide
73
" It is recommended that wireless networks use WPA-PSK, WPA, or stronger
encryption. IEEE 802.1x and WEP encryption are better than none at all, but it
is still possible for unauthorized devices to figure out the original information
pretty quickly.
It is not possible to use WPA-PSK, WPA or stronger encryption with a local
user database. In this case, it is better to set up stronger encryption with no
authentication than to set up weaker encryption with the local user database.
When you select WPA2 or WPA2-PSK in your NBG334S, you can also select an option
(WPA Compatible) to support WPA as well. In this case, if some wireless clients support
WPA and some support WPA2, you should set up WPA2-PSK or WPA2 (depending on the
type of wireless network login) and select the WPA Compatible option in the NBG334S.
Many types of encryption use a key to protect the information in the wireless network. The
longer the key, the stronger the encryption. Every wireless client in the wireless network must
have the same key.
5.3 Roaming
A wireless station is a device with an IEEE 802.11a/b/g compliant wireless interface. An
access point (AP) acts as a bridge between the wireless and wired networks. An AP creates its
own wireless coverage area. A wireless station can associate with a particular access point
only if it is within the access point’s coverage area.
In a network environment with multiple access points, wireless stations are able to switch from
one access point to another as they move between the coverage areas. This is known as
roaming. As the wireless station moves from place to place, it is responsible for choosing the
most appropriate access point depending on the signal strength, network utilization or other
factors.
The roaming feature on the access points allows the access points to relay information about
the wireless stations to each other. When a wireless station moves from a coverage area to
another, it scans and uses the channel of a new access point, which then informs the other
access points on the LAN about the change. An example is shown in Figure 34 on page 74.
With roaming, a wireless LAN mobile user enjoys a continuous connection to the wired
network through an access point while moving around the wireless LAN.
Enable roaming to exchange the latest bridge information of all wireless stations between APs
when a wireless station moves between coverage areas. Wireless stations can still associate
with other APs even if you disable roaming. Enabling roaming ensures correct traffic
forwarding (bridge tables are updated) and maximum AP efficiency. The AP deletes records
of wireless stations that associate with other APs (Non-ZyXEL APs may not be able to
perform this). 802.1x authentication information is not exchanged (at the time of writing).
Chapter 5 Wireless LAN
NBG334S User’s Guide
74
Figure 34 Roaming Example
The steps below describe the roaming process.
1 Wireless station Y moves from the coverage area of access point AP 1 to that of access
point AP 2.
2 Wireless station Y scans and detects the signal of access point AP 2.
3 Wireless station Y sends an association request to access point AP 2.
4 Access point AP 2 acknowledges the presence of wireless station Y and relays this
information to access point AP 1 through the wired LAN.
5 Access point AP 1 updates the new position of wireless station Y.
5.3.1 Requirements for Roaming
The following requirements must be met in order for wireless stations to roam between the
coverage areas.
1 All the access points must be on the same subnet and configured with the same ESSID.
2 If IEEE 802.1x user authentication is enabled and to be done locally on the access point,
the new access point must have the user profile for the wireless station.
3 The adjacent access points should use different radio channels when their coverage areas
overlap.
4 All access points must use the same port number to relay roaming information.
5 The access points must be connected to the Ethernet and be able to get IP addresses from
a DHCP server if using dynamic IP address assignment.
5.4 Quality of Service
This section discusses the Quality of Service (QoS) features available on the NBG334S.
Chapter 5 Wireless LAN
NBG334S User’s Guide
75
5.4.1 WMM QoS
WMM (Wi-Fi MultiMedia) QoS (Quality of Service) ensures quality of service in wireless
networks. It controls WLAN transmission priority on packets to be transmitted over the
wireless network.
WMM QoS prioritizes wireless traffic according to delivery requirements. WMM QoS is a
part of the IEEE 802.11e QoS enhancement to certified Wi-Fi wireless networks.
On APs without WMM QoS, all traffic streams are given the same access priority to the
wireless network. If the introduction of another traffic stream creates a data transmission
demand that exceeds the current network capacity, then the new traffic stream reduces the
throughput of the other traffic streams.
The NBG334S uses WMM QoS to prioritize traffic streams according to the IEEE 802.1q tag
or DSCP information in each packet’s header. The NBG334S automatically determines the
priority to use for an individual traffic stream. This prevents reductions in data transmission
for applications that are sensitive to latency (delay) and jitter (variations in delay).
5.4.1.1 WMM QoS Priorities
The following table describes the WMM QoS priority levels that the NBG334S uses.
5.5 General Wireless LAN Screen
" If you are configuring the NBG334S from a computer connected to the
wireless LAN and you change the NBG334S’s SSID, channel or security
settings, you will lose your wireless connection when you press Apply to
confirm. You must then change the wireless settings of your computer to
match the NBG334S’s new settings.
Click Network > Wireless LAN to open the General screen.
Table 26 WMM QoS Priorities
PRIORITY LEVEL DESCRIPTION
voice
(WMM_VOICE)
Typically used for traffic that is especially sensitive to jitter. Use this priority
to reduce latency for improved voice quality.
video
(WMM_VIDEO)
Typically used for traffic which has some tolerance for jitter but needs to be
prioritized over other data traffic.
best effort
(WMM_BEST_EFFORT)
Typically used for traffic from applications or devices that lack QoS
capabilities. Use best effort priority for traffic that is less sensitive to latency,
but is affected by long delays, such as Internet surfing.
background
(WMM_BACKGROUND)
This is typically used for non-critical traffic such as bulk transfers and print
jobs that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users.
Use background priority for applications that do not have strict latency and
throughput requirements.
Chapter 5 Wireless LAN
NBG334S User’s Guide
76
Figure 35 Network > Wireless LAN > General
The following table describes the general wireless LAN labels in this screen.
See the rest of this chapter for information on the other labels in this screen.
5.5.1 No Security
Select No Security to allow wireless stations to communicate with the access points without
any data encryption.
" If you do not enable any wireless security on your NBG334S, your network is
accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range.
Table 27 Network > Wireless LAN > General
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Enable
Wireless LAN
Click the check box to activate wireless LAN.
Name(SSID) (Service Set IDentity) The SSID identifies the Service Set with which a wireless
station is associated. Wireless stations associating to the access point (AP) must
have the same SSID. Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 printable 7-bit ASCII
characters) for the wireless LAN.
Hide SSID Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station
cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool.
Channel
Selection
Set the operating frequency/channel depending on your particular region.
Select a channel from the drop-down list box. The options vary depending on
whether you are using A or B/G frequency band and the country you are in.
Refer to the Connection Wizard chapter for more information on channels.
Operating
Channel
This displays the channel the NBG334S is currently using.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334S.
Reset Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen.
Chapter 5 Wireless LAN
NBG334S User’s Guide
77
Figure 36 Network > Wireless LAN > General: No Security
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
5.5.2 WEP Encryption
WEP encryption scrambles the data transmitted between the wireless stations and the access
points to keep network communications private. It encrypts unicast and multicast
communications in a network. Both the wireless stations and the access points must use the
same WEP key.
Your NBG334S allows you to configure up to four 64-bit or 128-bit WEP keys but only one
key can be enabled at any one time.
In order to configure and enable WEP encryption; click Network > Wireless LAN to display
the General screen. Select Static WEP from the Security Mode list.
Table 28 Wireless No Security
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Security Mode Choose No Security from the drop-down list box.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334S.
Reset Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen.
Chapter 5 Wireless LAN
NBG334S User’s Guide
78
Figure 37 Network > Wireless LAN > General: Static WEP
The following table describes the wireless LAN security labels in this screen.
Table 29 Network > Wireless LAN > General: Static WEP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Passphrase Enter a passphrase (password phrase) of up to 32 printable characters and click
Generate. The NBG334S automatically generates four different WEP keys and
displays them in the Key fields below.
WEP
Encryption
Select 64-bit WEP or 128-bit WEP to enable data encryption.
Authentication
Method
This field is activated when you select 64-bit WEP or 128-bit WEP in the WEP
Encryption field.
Select Auto, Open System or Shared Key from the drop-down list box.
ASCII Select this option in order to enter ASCII characters as WEP key.
Hex Select this option in order to enter hexadecimal characters as a WEP key.
The preceding "0x", that identifies a hexadecimal key, is entered automatically.
Key 1 to Key 4 The WEP keys are used to encrypt data. Both the NBG334S and the wireless
stations must use the same WEP key for data transmission.
If you chose 64-bit WEP, then enter any 5 ASCII characters or 10 hexadecimal
characters ("0-9", "A-F").
If you chose 128-bit WEP, then enter 13 ASCII characters or 26 hexadecimal
characters ("0-9", "A-F").
You must configure at least one key, only one key can be activated at any one time.
The default key is key 1.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334S.
Reset Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen.
Chapter 5 Wireless LAN
NBG334S User’s Guide
79
5.5.3 WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK
Click Network > Wireless LAN to display the General screen. Select WPA-PSK or WPA2-
PSK from the Security Mode list.
Figure 38 Network > Wireless LAN > General: WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 30 Network > Wireless LAN > General: WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK
LABEL DESCRIPTION
WPA Compatible This check box is available only when you select WPA2-PSK or WPA2 in the
Security Mode field.
Select the check box to have both WPA2 and WPA wireless clients be able to
communicate with the NBG334S even when the NBG334S is using WPA2-PSK or
WPA2.
Pre-Shared Key The encryption mechanisms used for WPA/WPA2 and WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK
are the same. The only difference between the two is that WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK
uses a simple common password, instead of user-specific credentials.
Type a pre-shared key from 8 to 63 case-sensitive ASCII characters (including
spaces and symbols).
ReAuthentication
Timer (in
seconds)
Specify how often wireless stations have to resend usernames and passwords in
order to stay connected. Enter a time interval between 10 and 9999 seconds. The
default time interval is 1800 seconds (30 minutes).
Note: If wireless station authentication is done using a RADIUS
server, the reauthentication timer on the RADIUS server has
priority.
Idle Timeout The NBG334S automatically disconnects a wireless station from the wired
network after a period of inactivity. The wireless station needs to enter the
username and password again before access to the wired network is allowed. The
default time interval is 3600 seconds (or 1 hour).
Chapter 5 Wireless LAN
NBG334S User’s Guide
80
5.5.4 WPA/WPA2
Click Network > Wireless LAN to display the General screen. Select WPA or WPA2 from
the Security Mode list.
Figure 39 Network > Wireless LAN > General: WPA/WPA2
Group Key
Update Timer
The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the AP (if using WPA-PSK/
WPA2-PSK key management) or RADIUS server (if using WPA/WPA2 key
management) sends a new group key out to all clients. The re-keying process is
the WPA/WPA2 equivalent of automatically changing the WEP key for an AP and
all stations in a WLAN on a periodic basis. Setting of the Group Key Update
Timer is also supported in WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK mode. The default is 1800
seconds (30 minutes).
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334S.
Reset Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen.
Table 30 Network > Wireless LAN > General: WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 5 Wireless LAN
NBG334S User’s Guide
81
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 31 Network > Wireless LAN > General: WPA/WPA2
LABEL DESCRIPTION
WPA Compatible This check box is available only when you select WPA2-PSK or WPA2 in the
Security Mode field.
Select the check box to have both WPA2 and WPA wireless clients be able to
communicate with the NBG334S even when the NBG334S is using WPA2-PSK
or WPA2.
ReAuthentication
Timer (in seconds)
Specify how often wireless stations have to resend usernames and passwords in
order to stay connected. Enter a time interval between 10 and 9999 seconds.
The default time interval is 1800 seconds (30 minutes).
Note: If wireless station authentication is done using a RADIUS
server, the reauthentication timer on the RADIUS server
has priority.
Idle Timeout The NBG334S automatically disconnects a wireless station from the wired
network after a period of inactivity. The wireless station needs to enter the
username and password again before access to the wired network is allowed.
The default time interval is 3600 seconds (or 1 hour).
Group Key Update
Timer
The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the AP (if using WPA-PSK/
WPA2-PSK key management) or RADIUS server (if using WPA/WPA2 key
management) sends a new group key out to all clients. The re-keying process is
the WPA/WPA2 equivalent of automatically changing the WEP key for an AP
and all stations in a WLAN on a periodic basis. Setting of the Group Key Update
Timer is also supported in WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK mode. The NBG334S default
is 1800 seconds (30 minutes).
Authentication Server
IP Address Enter the IP address of the external authentication server in dotted decimal
notation.
Port Number Enter the port number of the external authentication server. The default port
number is 1812.
You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you
to do so with additional information.
Shared Secret Enter a password (up to 31 alphanumeric characters) as the key to be shared
between the external authentication server and the NBG334S.
The key must be the same on the external authentication server and your
NBG334S. The key is not sent over the network.
Accounting Server
Active Select Yes from the drop down list box to enable user accounting through an
external authentication server.
IP Address Enter the IP address of the external accounting server in dotted decimal notation.
Port Number Enter the port number of the external accounting server. The default port number
is 1813.
You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you
to do so with additional information.
Shared Secret Enter a password (up to 31 alphanumeric characters) as the key to be shared
between the external accounting server and the NBG334S.
The key must be the same on the external accounting server and your
NBG334S. The key is not sent over the network.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334S.
Reset Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen.
Chapter 5 Wireless LAN
NBG334S User’s Guide
82
5.6 MAC Filter
The MAC filter screen allows you to configure the NBG334S to give exclusive access to up to
32 devices (Allow) or exclude up to 32 devices from accessing the NBG334S (Deny). Every
Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is
assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example,
00:A0:C5:00:00:02. You need to know the MAC address of the devices to configure this
screen.
To change your NBG334S’s MAC filter settings, click Network > Wireless LAN > MAC
Filter. The screen appears as shown.
Figure 40 Network > Wireless LAN > MAC Filter
The following table describes the labels in this menu.
Table 32 Network > Wireless LAN > MAC Filter
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active Select Yes from the drop down list box to enable MAC address filtering.
Filter Action Define the filter action for the list of MAC addresses in the MAC Address table.
Select Deny to block access to the NBG334S, MAC addresses not listed will be
allowed to access the NBG334S
Select Allow to permit access to the NBG334S, MAC addresses not listed will be
denied access to the NBG334S.
Chapter 5 Wireless LAN
NBG334S User’s Guide
83
5.7 Wireless LAN Advanced Screen
Click Network > Wireless LAN > Advanced. The screen appears as shown.
Figure 41 Network > Wireless LAN > Advanced
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Set This is the index number of the MAC address.
MAC
Address
Enter the MAC addresses of the wireless station that are allowed or denied access to
the NBG334S in these address fields. Enter the MAC addresses in a valid MAC
address format, that is, six hexadecimal character pairs, for example,
12:34:56:78:9a:bc.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334S.
Reset Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen.
Table 32 Network > Wireless LAN > MAC Filter
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 33 Network > Wireless LAN > Advanced
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Roaming Configuration
Enable
Roaming
Select this option if your network environment has multiple APs and you want your
wireless device to be able to access the network as you move between wireless
networks.
Wireless Advanced Setup
RTS/CTS
Threshold
Data with its frame size larger than this value will perform the RTS (Request To
Send)/CTS (Clear To Send) handshake.
If the RTS/CTS value is greater than the Fragmentation Threshold value, then the
RTS/CTS handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they
reach RTS/CTS size.
Enter a value between 0 and 2432.
Fragmentation
Threshold
It is the maximum data fragment size that can be sent. Enter a value between 256
and 2432.
Chapter 5 Wireless LAN
NBG334S User’s Guide
84
5.8 Quality of Service (QoS) Screen
The QoS screen allows you to automatically give a service (such as e-mail, VoIP or FTP) a
priority level.
Click Network > Wireless LAN > QoS. The following screen appears.
Enable Intra-
BSS Traffic
A Basic Service Set (BSS) exists when all communications between wireless clients
or between a wireless client and a wired network client go through one access point
(AP).
Intra-BSS traffic is traffic between wireless clients in the BSS. When Intra-BSS is
enabled, wireless client A and B can access the wired network and communicate
with each other. When Intra-BSS is disabled, wireless client A and B can still access
the wired network but cannot communicate with each other.
Output Power Set the output power of the NBG334S in this field. If there is a high density of APs
within an area, decrease the output power of the NBG334S to reduce interference
with other APs.
802.11 Mode Select 802.11b to allow only IEEE 802.11b compliant WLAN devices to associate
with the NBG334S.
Select 802.11g to allow only IEEE 802.11g compliant WLAN devices to associate
with the NBG334S.
Select 802.11b/g to allow either IEEE802.11b or IEEE802.11g compliant WLAN
devices to associate with the NBG334S. The transmission rate of your NBG334S
might be reduced.
Super G Mode Use this field to enable or disable the Super G function. Super G mode is available
only if you select 802.11g or 802.11b/g in the 802.11 Mode field.
Super G provides higher data transmission rates than 802.11g.
Select Disabled if your wireless clients do not support Super G.
Select Super G with Dynamic Turbo if some or all of your wireless clients support
Super G with Dynamic Turbo. Dynamic Turbo uses two channels bonded together
to achieve higher transmission rates than 802.11g or Super G without Dynamic
Turbo. Dynamic Turbo is on only when all wireless devices on the network support it.
The wireless channel is automatically fixed at 6 if you select this mode.
Select Super G without Turbo if the wireless clients on your network support
Super G but do not support Dynamic Turbo.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334S.
Reset Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen.
Table 33 Network > Wireless LAN > Advanced
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 5 Wireless LAN
NBG334S User’s Guide
85
Figure 42 Network > Wireless LAN > QoS
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 34 Network > Wireless LAN > QoS
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Enable WMM QoS Select this to turn on WMM QoS (Wireless MultiMedia Quality of
Service). The NBG334S assigns priority to packets based on the
802.1q or DSCP information in their headers. If a packet has no
WMM information in its header, it is assigned the default priority.
WMM QoS Policy Select Default to have the NBG334S automatically give a service a
priority level according to the ToS value in the IP header of packets
it sends. WMM QoS (Wifi MultiMedia Quality of Service) gives high
priority to voice and video, which makes them run more smoothly.
Select Application Priority from the drop-down list box to display a
table of application names, services, ports and priorities to which
you want to apply WMM QoS.
The table appears only if you select Application Priority in WMM
QoS Policy.
# This is the number of an individual application entry.
Name This field displays a description given to an application entry.
Service This field displays either FTP, WWW, E-mail or a User Defined
service to which you want to apply WMM QoS.
Dest Port This field displays the destination port number to which the
application sends traffic.
Chapter 5 Wireless LAN
NBG334S User’s Guide
86
5.8.1 Application Priority Configuration
Use this screen to edit a WMM QoS application entry. Click the edit icon under Modify. The
following screen displays.
Figure 43 Network > Wireless LAN > QoS: Application Priority Configuration
See Appendix F on page 259 for a list of commonly-used services and destination ports. The
following table describes the fields in this screen.
Priority This field displays the priority of the application.
Highest - Typically used for voice or video that should be high-
quality.
High - Typically used for voice or video that can be medium-quality.
Mid - Typically used for applications that do not fit into another
priority. For example, Internet surfing.
Low - Typically used for non-critical “background” applications,
such as large file transfers and print jobs that should not affect
other applications.
Modify Click the Edit icon to open the Application Priority Configuration
screen. Modify an existing application entry or create a application
entry in the Application Priority Configuration screen.
Click the Remove icon to delete an application entry.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the NBG334S.
Table 34 Network > Wireless LAN > QoS (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 35 Network > Wireless LAN > QoS: Application Priority Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Application Priority Configuration
Name Type a description of the application priority.
Chapter 5 Wireless LAN
NBG334S User’s Guide
87
Service The following is a description of the applications you can prioritize with WMM
QoS. Select a service from the drop-down list box.
• E-Mail
Electronic mail consists of messages sent through a computer network to
specific groups or individuals. Here are some default ports for e-mail:
POP3 - port 110
IMAP - port 143
SMTP - port 25
HTTP - port 80
•FTP
File Transfer Protocol enables fast transfer of files, including large files that it
may not be possible to send via e-mail. FTP uses port number 21.
•WWW
The World Wide Web is an Internet system to distribute graphical, hyper-
linked information, based on Hyper Text Transfer Protocol (HTTP) - a client/
server protocol for the World Wide Web. The Web is not synonymous with the
Internet; rather, it is just one service on the Internet. Other services on the
Internet include Internet Relay Chat and Newsgroups. The Web is accessed
through use of a browser.
•User-Defined
User-defined services are user specific services configured using known ports
and applications.
Dest Port This displays the port the selected service uses. Type a port number in the
field provided if you want to use a different port to the default port.
Priority Select a priority from the drop-down list box.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334S.
Cancel Click Cancel to return to the previous screen.
Table 35 Network > Wireless LAN > QoS: Application Priority Configuration (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 5 Wireless LAN
NBG334S User’s Guide
88
NBG334S User’s Guide
89
CHAPTER 6
Wireless Tutorial
6.1 How to Connect to the Internet from a Notebook
This section gives you an example of how to set up an access point and wireless client such as
a notebook for wireless communication. The notebook (N) can access the Internet through an
AP wirelessly.
Figure 44 Wireless AP Connection to the Internet
6.1.1 Example Parameters
An access point or wireless router is referred to as an “AP” and a computer with a wireless
network card or USB/PCI adapter is referred to as a “wireless client” here.
6.2 Enable and Configure Wireless Security on your
NBG334S
Follow the steps below to configure the wireless settings on your NBG334S.
The instructions require that your hardware is connected (see the Quick Start Guide) and you
are logged into the web configurator through your LAN connection (see Section 2.2 on page
33).
1 Open the Wireless LAN > General screen in the AP’s web configurator.
2 Make sure the Enable Wireless LAN check box is selected.
3 Enter SSID_Example3 as the SSID and select a channel.
N
AP
Internet
SSID SSID_Example3
Channel 6
Security WPA-PSK
(Pre-Shared Key: ThisismyWPA-PSKpre-sharedkey)
Chapter 6 Wireless Tutorial
NBG334S User’s Guide
90
4 Set security mode to WPA-PSK and enter ThisismyWPA-PSKpre-sharedkey in the
Pre-Shared Key field. Click Apply.
Figure 45 Network > Wireless LAN > General
5 Open the Status screen. Verify your wireless and wireless security settings under Device
Information and check if the WLAN connection is up under Interface Status.
Figure 46 Status: AP Mode
Chapter 6 Wireless Tutorial
NBG334S User’s Guide
91
6.3 Configure Your Notebook
" We use the ZyXEL M-302 wireless adapter utility screens as an example for
the wireless client. The screens may vary for different models.
1 The NBG334S supports IEEE 802.11b and IEEE 802.11g wireless clients. Make sure
that your notebook or computer’s wireless adapter supports one of these standards.
2 Wireless adapters come with software sometimes called a “utility” that you install on
your computer. See your wireless adapter’s User’s Guide for information on how to do
that.
3 After you’ve installed the utility, open it. If you cannot see your utility’s icon on your
screen, go to Start > Programs and click on your utility in the list of programs that
appears. The utility displays a list of APs within range, as shown in the example screen
below.
4 Select SSID_Example3 and click Connect.
Figure 47 Connecting a Wireless Client to a Wireless Network t
5 Select WPA-PSK and type the security key in the following screen. Click Next.
Figure 48 Security Settings
6 The Confirm Save window appears. Check your settings and click Save to continue.
Chapter 6 Wireless Tutorial
NBG334S User’s Guide
92
Figure 49 Confirm Save
7 Check the status of your wireless connection in the screen below. If your wireless
connection is weak or you have no connection, see the Troubleshooting section of this
User’s Guide.
Figure 50 Link Status
8 If your connection is successful, open your Internet browser and enter http://
www.zyxel.com or the URL of any other web site in the address bar. If you are able to
access the web site, your wireless connection is successfully configured.
NBG334S User’s Guide
93
CHAPTER 7
WAN
This chapter describes how to configure WAN settings.
7.1 WAN Overview
See the chapter about the connection wizard for more information on the fields in the WAN
screens.
7.2 WAN MAC Address
The MAC address screen allows users to configure the WAN port's MAC address by either
using the factory default or cloning the MAC address from a computer on your LAN. Choose
Factory Default to select the factory assigned default MAC Address.
Otherwise, click Clone the computer's MAC address - IP Address and enter the IP address
of the computer on the LAN whose MAC you are cloning. Once it is successfully configured,
the address will be copied to the rom file (ZyNOS configuration file). It will not change unless
you change the setting or upload a different ROM file.
It is recommended that you clone the
MAC address prior to hooking up the WAN Port.
7.3 Multicast
Traditionally, IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways - Unicast (1 sender - 1
recipient) or Broadcast (1 sender - everybody on the network). Multicast delivers IP packets to
a group of hosts on the network - not everybody and not just 1.
IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish
membership in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. IGMP version 2 (RFC
2236) is an improvement over version 1 (RFC 1112) but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use. If
you would like to read more detailed information about interoperability between IGMP
version 2 and version 1, please see sections 4 and 5 of RFC 2236. The class D IP address is
used to identify host groups and can be in the range 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. The address
224.0.0.0 is not assigned to any group and is used by IP multicast computers. The address
224.0.0.1 is used for query messages and is assigned to the permanent group of all IP hosts
(including gateways). All hosts must join the 224.0.0.1 group in order to participate in IGMP.
The address 224.0.0.2 is assigned to the multicast routers group.
Chapter 7 WAN
NBG334S User’s Guide
94
The NBG334S supports both IGMP version 1 (IGMP-v1) and IGMP version 2 (IGMP-v2).
At start up, the NBG334S queries all directly connected networks to gather group
membership. After that, the NBG334S periodically updates this information. IP multicasting
can be enabled/disabled on the NBG334S LAN and/or WAN interfaces in the web
configurator (LAN; WA N). Select None to disable IP multicasting on these interfaces.
7.4 Internet Connection
Use this screen to change your NBG334S’s Internet access settings. Click Network > WAN .
The screen differs according to the encapsulation you choose.
7.4.1 Ethernet Encapsulation
This screen displays when you select Ethernet encapsulation.
Figure 51 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: Ethernet Encapsulation
Chapter 7 WAN
NBG334S User’s Guide
95
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
7.4.2 PPPoE Encapsulation
The NBG334S supports PPPoE (Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet). PPPoE is an IETF
standard (RFC 2516) specifying how a personal computer (PC) interacts with a broadband
modem (DSL, cable, wireless, etc.) connection. The PPP over Ethernet option is for a dial-
up connection using PPPoE.
Table 36 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: Ethernet Encapsulation
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Encapsulation You must choose the Ethernet option when the WAN port is used as a regular
Ethernet.
Service Type Choose from Standard, RR-Telstra (RoadRunner Telstra authentication
method), RR-Manager (Roadrunner Manager authentication method), RR-
Toshiba (Roadrunner Toshiba authentication method) or Telia Login.
The following fields do not appear with the Standard service type.
WAN IP Address Assignment
Get automatically
from ISP
Select this option If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address. This is the
default selection.
Use Fixed IP
Address
Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address.
IP Address Enter your WAN IP address in this field if you selected Use Fixed IP Address.
IP Subnet
Mask
Enter the IP Subnet Mask in this field.
Gateway IP
Address
Enter a Gateway IP Address (if your ISP gave you one) in this field.
DNS Servers
First DNS Server
Second DNS
Server
Third DNS Server
Select From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information (and the
NBG334S's WAN IP address). The field to the right displays the (read-only) DNS
server IP address that the ISP assigns.
Select User-Defined if you have the IP address of a DNS server. Enter the DNS
server's IP address in the field to the right. If you chose User-Defined, but leave
the IP address set to 0.0.0.0, User-Defined changes to None after you click
Apply. If you set a second choice to User-Defined, and enter the same IP
address, the second User-Defined changes to None after you click Apply.
Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers. If you do not configure
a DNS server, you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it.
WAN MAC
Address
The MAC address section allows users to configure the WAN port's MAC address
by either using the NBG334S’s MAC address, copying the MAC address from a
computer on your LAN or manually entering a MAC address.
Factory default Select Factory default to use the factory assigned default MAC Address.
Clone the
computer’s MAC
address
Select Clone the computer's MAC address - IP Address and enter the IP
address of the computer on the LAN whose MAC you are cloning. Once it is
successfully configured, the address will be copied to the rom file (ZyNOS
configuration file). It will not change unless you change the setting or upload a
different ROM file.
Set WAN MAC
Address
Select this option and enter the MAC address you want to use.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334S.
Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 7 WAN
NBG334S User’s Guide
96
For the service provider, PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that works with
existing access control systems (for example Radius).
One of the benefits of PPPoE is the ability to let you access one of multiple network services,
a function known as dynamic service selection. This enables the service provider to easily
create and offer new IP services for individuals.
Operationally, PPPoE saves significant effort for both you and the ISP or carrier, as it requires
no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the customer site.
By implementing PPPoE directly on the NBG334S (rather than individual computers), the
computers on the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed, since the NBG334S does that
part of the task. Furthermore, with NAT, all of the LANs’ computers will have access.
This screen displays when you select PPPoE encapsulation.
Figure 52 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: PPPoE Encapsulation
Chapter 7 WAN
NBG334S User’s Guide
97
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 37 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: PPPoE Encapsulation
LABEL DESCRIPTION
ISP Parameters for Internet Access
Encapsulation The PPP over Ethernet choice is for a dial-up connection using PPPoE. The
NBG334S supports PPPoE (Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet). PPPoE is an
IETF Draft standard (RFC 2516) specifying how a personal computer (PC)
interacts with a broadband modem (i.e. xDSL, cable, wireless, etc.) connection.
Operationally, PPPoE saves significant effort for both the end user and ISP/carrier,
as it requires no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the customer
site. By implementing PPPoE directly on the router rather than individual
computers, the computers on the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed, since
the router does that part of the task. Further, with NAT, all of the LAN's computers
will have access.
Service Name Type the PPPoE service name provided to you. PPPoE uses a service name to
identify and reach the PPPoE server.
User Name Type the user name given to you by your ISP.
Password Type the password associated with the user name above.
Retype to
Confirm
Type your password again to make sure that you have entered is correctly.
Nailed-Up
Connection
Select Nailed-Up Connection if you do not want the connection to time out.
Idle Timeout This value specifies the time in seconds that elapses before the router
automatically disconnects from the PPPoE server.
WAN IP Address Assignment
Get automatically
from ISP
Select this option If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address. This is the
default selection.
Use Fixed IP
Address
Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address.
My WAN IP
Address
Enter your WAN IP address in this field if you selected Use Fixed IP Address.
Remote IP
Address
Enter the remote IP address (if your ISP gave you one) in this field.
Remote IP
Subnet Mask
Enter the remote IP subnet mask in this field.
DNS Servers
First DNS Server
Second DNS
Server
Third DNS Server
Select From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information (and the
NBG334S's WAN IP address). The field to the right displays the (read-only) DNS
server IP address that the ISP assigns.
Select User-Defined if you have the IP address of a DNS server. Enter the DNS
server's IP address in the field to the right. If you chose User-Defined, but leave
the IP address set to 0.0.0.0, User-Defined changes to None after you click
Apply. If you set a second choice to User-Defined, and enter the same IP
address, the second User-Defined changes to None after you click Apply.
Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers. If you do not configure a
DNS server, you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it.
WAN MAC
Address
The MAC address section allows users to configure the WAN port's MAC address
by using the NBG334S’s MAC address, copying the MAC address from a computer
on your LAN or manually entering a MAC address.
Factory default Select Factory default to use the factory assigned default MAC Address.
Chapter 7 WAN
NBG334S User’s Guide
98
7.4.3 PPTP Encapsulation
Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP) is a network protocol that enables secure transfer of
data from a remote client to a private server, creating a Virtual Private Network (VPN) using
TCP/IP-based networks.
PPTP supports on-demand, multi-protocol and virtual private networking over public
networks, such as the Internet.
This screen displays when you select PPTP encapsulation.
Clone the
computer’s MAC
address
Select Clone the computer's MAC address - IP Address and enter the IP
address of the computer on the LAN whose MAC you are cloning. Once it is
successfully configured, the address will be copied to the rom file (ZyNOS
configuration file). It will not change unless you change the setting or upload a
different ROM file.
Set WAN MAC
Address
Select this option and enter the MAC address you want to use.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334S.
Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 37 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: PPPoE Encapsulation
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 7 WAN
NBG334S User’s Guide
99
Figure 53 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: PPTP Encapsulation
Chapter 7 WAN
NBG334S User’s Guide
100
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 38 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: PPTP Encapsulation
LABEL DESCRIPTION
ISP Parameters for Internet Access
Encapsulation Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP) is a network protocol that enables
secure transfer of data from a remote client to a private server, creating a
Virtual Private Network (VPN) using TCP/IP-based networks. PPTP supports
on-demand, multi-protocol, and virtual private networking over public
networks, such as the Internet. The NBG334S supports only one PPTP server
connection at any given time.
To configure a PPTP client, you must configure the User Name and
Password fields for a PPP connection and the PPTP parameters for a PPTP
connection.
User Name Type the user name given to you by your ISP.
Password Type the password associated with the User Name above.
Retype to Confirm Type your password again to make sure that you have entered is correctly.
Nailed-up Connection Select Nailed-Up Connection if you do not want the connection to time out.
Idle Timeout This value specifies the time in seconds that elapses before the NBG334S
automatically disconnects from the PPTP server.
PPTP Configuration
Get automatically from
ISP
Select this option If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address. This is the
default selection.
Use Fixed IP Address Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address.
My IP Address Type the (static) IP address assigned to you by your ISP.
My IP Subnet
Mask
Your NBG334S will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP
address that you assign. Unless you are implementing subnetting, use the
subnet mask computed by the NBG334S.
Server IP Address Type the IP address of the PPTP server.
Connection ID/
Name
Type your identification name for the PPTP server.
WAN IP Address Assignment
Get automatically from
ISP
Select this option If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address. This is the
default selection.
Use Fixed IP Address Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address.
My WAN IP
Address
Enter your WAN IP address in this field if you selected Use Fixed IP
Address.
Remote IP
Address
Enter the remote IP address (if your ISP gave you one) in this field.
Remote IP Subnet
Mask
Enter the remote IP subnet mask in this field.
DNS Servers
Chapter 7 WAN
NBG334S User’s Guide
101
7.5 Advanced WAN Screen
To change your NBG334S’s advanced WAN settings, click Network > WA N > Advanced.
The screen appears as shown.
Figure 54 Network > WAN > Advanced
First DNS Server
Second DNS Server
Third DNS Server
Select From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information (and
the NBG334S's WAN IP address). The field to the right displays the (read-
only) DNS server IP address that the ISP assigns.
Select User-Defined if you have the IP address of a DNS server. Enter the
DNS server's IP address in the field to the right. If you chose User-Defined,
but leave the IP address set to 0.0.0.0, User-Defined changes to None after
you click Apply. If you set a second choice to User-Defined, and enter the
same IP address, the second User-Defined changes to None after you click
Apply.
Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers. If you do not
configure a DNS server, you must know the IP address of a computer in order
to access it.
WAN MAC Address The MAC address section allows users to configure the WAN port's MAC
address by either using the NBG334S’s MAC address, copying the MAC
address from a computer on your LAN or manually entering a MAC address.
Factory default Select Factory default to use the factory assigned default MAC Address.
Clone the computer’s
MAC address
Select Clone the computer's MAC address - IP Address and enter the IP
address of the computer on the LAN whose MAC you are cloning. Once it is
successfully configured, the address will be copied to the rom file (ZyNOS
configuration file). It will not change unless you change the setting or upload a
different ROM file.
Set WAN MAC
Address
Select this option and enter the MAC address you want to use.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334S.
Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 38 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: PPTP Encapsulation
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 7 WAN
NBG334S User’s Guide
102
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 39 WAN > Advanced
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Multicast Setup
Multicast Select IGMP V-1, IGMP V-2 or None. IGMP (Internet Group Multicast
Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a
Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. IGMP version 2 (RFC 2236)
is an improvement over version 1 (RFC 1112) but IGMP version 1 is still in
wide use. If you would like to read more detailed information about
interoperability between IGMP version 2 and version 1, please see sections 4
and 5 of RFC 2236.
Windows Networking (NetBIOS over TCP/IP): NetBIOS (Network Basic Input/Output System) are TCP
or UDP broadcast packets that enable a computer to connect to and communicate with a LAN. For
some dial-up services such as PPPoE or PPTP, NetBIOS packets cause unwanted calls. However it
may sometimes be necessary to allow NetBIOS packets to pass through to the WAN in order to find a
computer on the WAN.
Allow between LAN
and WAN
Select this check box to forward NetBIOS packets from the LAN to the WAN
and from the WAN to the LAN. If your firewall is enabled with the default
policy set to block WAN to LAN traffic, you also need to enable the default
WAN to LAN firewall rule that forwards NetBIOS traffic.
Clear this check box to block all NetBIOS packets going from the LAN to the
WAN and from the WAN to the LAN.
Allow Trigger Dial Select this option to allow NetBIOS packets to initiate calls.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334S.
Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
NBG334S User’s Guide
103
CHAPTER 8
LAN
This chapter describes how to configure LAN settings.
8.1 LAN Overview
A Local Area Network (LAN) is a shared communication system to which many computers
are attached. A LAN is a computer network limited to the immediate area, usually the same
building or floor of a building. The LAN screens can help you configure a LAN DHCP server,
manage IP addresses, and partition your physical network into logical networks.
8.1.1 IP Pool Setup
The NBG334S is pre-configured with a pool of 32 IP addresses starting from 192.168.1.33 to
192.168.1.64. This configuration leaves 31 IP addresses (excluding the NBG334S itself) in the
lower range (192.168.1.2 to 192.168.1.32) for other server computers, for instance, servers for
mail, FTP, TFTP, web, etc., that you may have.
8.1.2 System DNS Servers
Refer to the IP address and subnet mask section in the Connection Wizard chapter.
8.2 LAN TCP/IP
The NBG334S has built-in DHCP server capability that assigns IP addresses and DNS servers
to systems that support DHCP client capability.
8.2.1 Factory LAN Defaults
The LAN parameters of the NBG334S are preset in the factory with the following values:
• IP address of 192.168.1.1 with subnet mask of 255.255.255.0 (24 bits)
• DHCP server enabled with 32 client IP addresses starting from 192.168.1.33.
These parameters should work for the majority of installations. If your ISP gives you explicit
DNS server address(es), read the embedded web configurator help regarding what fields need
to be configured.
Chapter 8 LAN
NBG334S User’s Guide
104
8.2.2 IP Address and Subnet Mask
Refer to the IP address and subnet mask section in the Connection Wizard chapter for this
information.
8.2.3 Multicast
Traditionally, IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways - Unicast (1 sender - 1
recipient) or Broadcast (1 sender - everybody on the network). Multicast delivers IP packets to
a group of hosts on the network - not everybody and not just 1.
IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish
membership in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. IGMP version 2 (RFC
2236) is an improvement over version 1 (RFC 1112) but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use. If
you would like to read more detailed information about interoperability between IGMP
version 2 and version 1, please see sections 4 and 5 of RFC 2236. The class D IP address is
used to identify host groups and can be in the range 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. The address
224.0.0.0 is not assigned to any group and is used by IP multicast computers. The address
224.0.0.1 is used for query messages and is assigned to the permanent group of all IP hosts
(including gateways). All hosts must join the 224.0.0.1 group in order to participate in IGMP.
The address 224.0.0.2 is assigned to the multicast routers group.
The NBG334S supports both IGMP version 1 (IGMP-v1) and IGMP version 2 (IGMP-v2).
At start up, the NBG334S queries all directly connected networks to gather group
membership. After that, the NBG334S periodically updates this information. IP multicasting
can be enabled/disabled on the NBG334S LAN and/or WAN interfaces in the web
configurator (LAN; WA N). Select None to disable IP multicasting on these interfaces.
8.2.4 Any IP
Traditionally, you must set the IP addresses and the subnet masks of a computer and the
NBG334S to be in the same subnet to allow the computer to access the Internet (through the
NBG334S). In cases where your computer is required to use a static IP address in another
network, you may need to manually configure the network settings of the computer every time
you want to access the Internet via the NBG334S.
With the Any IP feature and NAT enabled, the NBG334S allows a computer to access the
Internet without changing the network settings (such as IP address and subnet mask) of the
computer, when the IP addresses of the computer and the NBG334S are not in the same
subnet. Whether a computer is set to use a dynamic or static (fixed) IP address, you can simply
connect the computer to the NBG334S and access the Internet.
The following figure depicts a scenario where a computer is set to use a static private IP
address in the corporate environment. In a residential house where a NBG334S is installed,
you can still use the computer to access the Internet without changing the network settings,
even when the IP addresses of the computer and the NBG334S are not in the same subnet.
Chapter 8 LAN
NBG334S User’s Guide
105
Figure 55 Any IP Example
The Any IP feature does not apply to a computer using either a dynamic IP address or a static
IP address that is in the same subnet as the NBG334S’s IP address.
" You must enable NAT to use the Any IP feature on the NBG334S.
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is a protocol for mapping an Internet Protocol address (IP
address) to a physical machine address, also known as a Media Access Control or MAC
address, on the local area network. IP routing table is defined on IP Ethernet devices (the
NBG334S) to decide which hop to use,
to help forward data along to its specified destination.
The following lists out the steps taken, when a computer tries to access the Internet for the first
time through the NBG334S.
1 When a computer (which is in a different subnet) first attempts to access the Internet, it
sends packets to its default gateway (which is not the NBG334S) by looking at the MAC
address in its ARP table.
2 When the computer cannot locate the default gateway, an ARP request is broadcast on
the LAN.
3 The NBG334S receives the ARP request and replies to the computer with its own MAC
address.
4 The computer updates the MAC address for the default gateway to the ARP table. Once
the ARP table is updated, the computer is able to access the Internet through the
NBG334S.
5 When the NBG334S receives packets from the computer, it creates an entry in the IP
routing table so it can properly forward packets intended for the computer.
After all the routing information is updated, the computer can access the NBG334S and the
Internet as if it is in the same subnet as the NBG334S.
Chapter 8 LAN
NBG334S User’s Guide
106
8.3 LAN IP Screen
Use this screen to change your basic LAN settings. Click Network > LAN.
Figure 56 Network > LAN > IP
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
8.4 LAN IP Alias
IP alias allows you to partition a physical network into different logical networks over the
same Ethernet interface. The NBG334S supports three logical LAN interfaces via its single
physical Ethernet interface with the NBG334S itself as the gateway for each LAN network.
To change your NBG334S’s IP alias settings, click Network > LAN > IP Alias. The screen
appears as shown.
Table 40 Network > LAN > IP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
LAN TCP/IP
IP Address Type the IP address of your NBG334S in dotted decimal notation 192.168.1.1
(factory default).
IP Subnet Mask The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your
NBG334S will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address
that you assign. Unless you are implementing subnetting, use the subnet mask
computed by the NBG334S.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334S.
Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 8 LAN
NBG334S User’s Guide
107
Figure 57 Network > LAN > IP Alias
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
8.5 Advanced LAN Screen
To change your NBG334S’s advanced IP settings, click Network > LAN > Advanced. The
screen appears as shown.
Figure 58 Network > LAN > Advanced
Table 41 Network > LAN > IP Alias
LABEL DESCRIPTION
IP Alias 1,2 Select the check box to configure another LAN network for the NBG334S.
IP Address Enter the IP address of your NBG334S in dotted decimal notation.
IP Subnet Mask Your NBG334S will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP
address that you assign. Unless you are implementing subnetting, use the
subnet mask computed by the NBG334S.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334S.
Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 8 LAN
NBG334S User’s Guide
108
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 42 Network > LAN > Advanced
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Multicast Select IGMP V-1 or IGMP V-2 or None. IGMP (Internet Group Multicast
Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a
Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. IGMP version 2 (RFC 2236)
is an improvement over version 1 (RFC 1112) but IGMP version 1 is still in
wide use. If you would like to read more detailed information about
interoperability between IGMP version 2 and version 1, please see sections 4
and 5 of RFC 2236.
Any IP Setup
Active Select this if you want to let computers on different subnets use the
NBG334S.
Windows Networking (NetBIOS over TCP/IP): NetBIOS (Network Basic Input/Output System) are TCP
or UDP broadcast packets that enable a computer to connect to and communicate with a LAN. For
some dial-up services such as PPPoE or PPTP, NetBIOS packets cause unwanted calls. However it
may sometimes be necessary to allow NetBIOS packets to pass through to the WAN in order to find a
computer on the WAN.
Allow between LAN
and WAN
Select this check box to forward NetBIOS packets from the LAN to the WAN
and from the WAN to the LAN. If your firewall is enabled with the default policy
set to block WAN to LAN traffic, you also need to enable the default WAN to
LAN firewall rule that forwards NetBIOS traffic.
Clear this check box to block all NetBIOS packets going from the LAN to the
WAN and from the WAN to the LAN.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334S.
Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
NBG334S User’s Guide
109
CHAPTER 9
DHCP
9.1 DHCP
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual
clients to obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. You can configure the
NBG334S as a DHCP server or disable it. When configured as a server, the NBG334S
provides the TCP/IP configuration for the clients. If DHCP service is disabled, you must have
another DHCP server on your LAN, or else the computer must be manually configured.
9.2 DHCP Server General Screen
Click Network > DHCP Server. The following screen displays.
Figure 59 Network > DHCP Server > General
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 43 Network > DHCP Server > General
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Enable DHCP Server DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132)
allows individual clients (computers) to obtain TCP/IP configuration at startup
from a server. Leave the Enable DHCP Server check box selected unless
your ISP instructs you to do otherwise. Clear it to disable the NBG334S acting
as a DHCP server. When configured as a server, the NBG334S provides
TCP/IP configuration for the clients. If not, DHCP service is disabled and you
must have another DHCP server on your LAN, or else the computers must be
manually configured. When set as a server, fill in the following four fields.
IP Pool Starting
Address
This field specifies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address
pool.
Pool Size This field specifies the size, or count of the IP address pool.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334S.
Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 9 DHCP
NBG334S User’s Guide
110
9.3 DHCP Server Advanced Screen
This screen allows you to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers
based on their MAC addresses. You can also use this screen to configure the DNS server
information that the NBG334S sends to the DHCP clients.
Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address
is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example,
00:A0:C5:00:00:02.
To change your NBG334S’s static DHCP settings, click Network > DHCP Server >
Advanced. The following screen displays.
Figure 60 Network > DHCP Server > Advanced
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 44 Network > DHCP Server > Advanced
LABEL DESCRIPTION
# This is the index number of the static IP table entry (row).
MAC Address Type the MAC address (with colons) of a computer on your LAN.
IP Address Type the LAN IP address of a computer on your LAN.
DNS Servers
Assigned by DHCP
Server
The NBG334S passes a DNS (Domain Name System) server IP address (in the
order you specify here) to the DHCP clients. The NBG334S only passes this
information to the LAN DHCP clients when you select the Enable DHCP Server
check box. When you clear the Enable DHCP Server check box, DHCP service
is disabled and you must have another DHCP sever on your LAN, or else the
computers must have their DNS server addresses manually configured.
Chapter 9 DHCP
NBG334S User’s Guide
111
9.4 Client List Screen
The DHCP table shows current DHCP client information (including IP Address, Host Name
and MAC Address) of all network clients using the NBG334S’s DHCP server.
Configure this screen to always assign an IP address to a MAC address (and host name). Click
Network > DHCP Server > Client List.
" You can also view a read-only client list by clicking the DHCP Table
(Details...) hyperlink in the Status screen.
The following screen displays.
Figure 61 Network > DHCP Server > Client List
First DNS Server
Second DNS
Server
Third DNS Server
Select From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information (and
the NBG334S's WAN IP address). The field to the right displays the (read-only)
DNS server IP address that the ISP assigns.
Select User-Defined if you have the IP address of a DNS server. Enter the DNS
server's IP address in the field to the right. If you chose User-Defined, but leave
the IP address set to 0.0.0.0, User-Defined changes to None after you click
Apply. If you set a second choice to User-Defined, and enter the same IP
address, the second User-Defined changes to None after you click Apply.
Select DNS Relay to have the NBG334S act as a DNS proxy. The NBG334S's
LAN IP address displays in the field to the right (read-only). The NBG334S tells
the DHCP clients on the LAN that the NBG334S itself is the DNS server. When a
computer on the LAN sends a DNS query to the NBG334S, the NBG334S
forwards the query to the NBG334S's system DNS server (configured in the
WAN > Internet Connection screen) and relays the response back to the
computer. You can only select DNS Relay for one of the three servers; if you
select DNS Relay for a second or third DNS server, that choice changes to
None after you click Apply.
Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers. If you do not configure
a DNS server, you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334S.
Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 44 Network > DHCP Server > Advanced
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 9 DHCP
NBG334S User’s Guide
112
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 45 Network > DHCP Server > Client List
LABEL DESCRIPTION
# This is the index number of the host computer.
IP Address This field displays the IP address relative to the # field listed above.
Host Name This field displays the computer host name.
MAC Address The MAC (Media Access Control) or Ethernet address on a LAN (Local Area
Network) is unique to your computer (six pairs of hexadecimal notation).
A network interface card such as an Ethernet adapter has a hardwired
address that is assigned at the factory. This address follows an industry
standard that ensures no other adapter has a similar address.
Reserve Select this check box to have the NBG334S always assign this IP address to
this MAC address (and host name). After you click Apply, the MAC address
and IP address also display in the Advanced screen (where you can edit
them).
Apply Click Apply to save your settings.
Refresh Click Refresh to reload the DHCP table.
NBG334S User’s Guide
113
CHAPTER 10
Network Address Translation
(NAT)
This chapter discusses how to configure NAT on the NBG334S.
10.1 NAT Overview
NAT (Network Address Translation - NAT, RFC 1631) is the translation of the IP address of a
host in a packet. For example, the source address of an outgoing packet, used within one
network is changed to a different IP address known within another network.
10.2 Using NAT
" You must create a firewall rule in addition to setting up NAT, to allow traffic
from the WAN to be forwarded through the NBG334S.
10.2.1 Port Forwarding: Services and Port Numbers
A port forwarding set is a list of inside (behind NAT on the LAN) servers, for example, web or
FTP, that you can make accessible to the outside world even though NAT makes your whole
inside network appear as a single machine to the outside world.
Use the Application screen to forward incoming service requests to the server(s) on your local
network. You may enter a single port number or a range of port numbers to be forwarded, and
the local IP address of the desired server. The port number identifies a service; for example,
web service is on port 80 and FTP on port 21. In some cases, such as for unknown services or
where one server can support more than one service (for example both FTP and web service),
it might be better to specify a range of port numbers.
In addition to the servers for specified services, NAT supports a default server. A service
request that does not have a server explicitly designated for it is forwarded to the default
server. If the default is not defined, the service request is simply discarded.
Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT)
NBG334S User’s Guide
114
" Many residential broadband ISP accounts do not allow you to run any server
processes (such as a Web or FTP server) from your location. Your ISP may
periodically check for servers and may suspend your account if it discovers
any active services at your location. If you are unsure, refer to your ISP.
10.2.2 Configuring Servers Behind Port Forwarding Example
Let's say you want to assign ports 21-25 to one FTP, Telnet and SMTP server (A in the
example), port 80 to another (B in the example) and assign a default server IP address of
192.168.1.35 to a third (C in the example). You assign the LAN IP addresses and the ISP
assigns the WAN IP address. The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet
Figure 62 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example
10.3 General NAT Screen
Click Network > NAT to open the General screen.
Figure 63 Network > NAT > General
Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT)
NBG334S User’s Guide
115
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
10.4 NAT Application Screen
Port forwarding allows you to define the local servers to which the incoming services will be
forwarded. To change your NBG334S’s port forwarding settings, click Network > NAT >
Application. The screen appears as shown.
" If you do not assign a Default Server IP address in the NAT > General
screen, the NBG334S discards all packets received for ports that are not
specified in this screen or remote management.
Refer to Appendix F on page 259 for port numbers commonly used for particular services.
Table 46 Network > NAT > General
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Enable Network
Address
Translation
Network Address Translation (NAT) allows the translation of an Internet protocol
address used within one network (for example a private IP address used in a local
network) to a different IP address known within another network (for example a
public IP address used on the Internet).
Select the check box to enable NAT.
Default Server
Setup
Default Server In addition to the servers for specified services, NAT supports a default server. A
default server receives packets from ports that are not specified in the Application
screen.
If you do not assign a Default Server IP address, the NBG334S discards all
packets received for ports that are not specified in the Application screen or
remote management.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334S.
Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT)
NBG334S User’s Guide
116
Figure 64 Network > NAT > Application
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 47 NAT Application
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Game List Update A game list includes the pre-defined service name(s) and port number(s). You can
edit and upload it to the NBG334S to replace the existing entries in the second
field next to Service Name.
File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse... to
find it.
Browse... Click Browse... to find the.txt file you want to upload. Remember that you must
decompress compressed (.zip) files before you can upload them.
Update Click Update to begin the upload process. This process may take up to two
minutes.
Add Application
Rule
Active Select the check box to enable this rule and the requested service can be
forwarded to the host with a specified internal IP address.
Clear the checkbox to disallow forwarding of these ports to an inside server
without having to delete the entry.
Service Name Type a name (of up to 31 printable characters) to identify this rule in the first field
next to Service Name. Otherwise, select a predefined service in the second field
next to Service Name. The predefined service name and port number(s) will
display in the Service Name and Port fields.
Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT)
NBG334S User’s Guide
117
10.4.1 Game List Example
Here is an example game list text file. The index number, service name and associated port(s)
are specified by semi-colons (no spaces). Use the name=xxx (where xxx is the service name)
to create a new service. Port range can be separated with a hyphen (-) (no spaces). Multiple
(non-consecutive) ports can be separated by commas.
Port Type a port number(s) to be forwarded.
To specify a range of ports, enter a hyphen (-) between the first port and the last
port, such as 10-20.
To specify two or more non-consecutive port numbers, separate them by a comma
without spaces, such as 123,567.
Server IP Address Type the inside IP address of the server that receives packets from the port(s)
specified in the Port field.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Application Rules Summary table.
Reset Click Reset to not save and return your new changes in the Service Name and
Port fields to the previous one.
Application Rules
Summary
# This is the number of an individual port forwarding server entry.
Active This icon is turned on when the rule is enabled.
Name This field displays a name to identify this rule.
Port This field displays the port number(s).
Server IP Address This field displays the inside IP address of the server.
Modify Click the Edit icon to display and modify an existing rule setting in the fields under
Add Application Rule.
Click the Remove icon to delete a rule.
Table 47 NAT Application (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT)
NBG334S User’s Guide
118
Figure 65 Game List Example
10.5 Trigger Port Forwarding
Some services use a dedicated range of ports on the client side and a dedicated range of ports
on the server side. With regular port forwarding you set a forwarding port in NAT to forward a
service (coming in from the server on the WAN) to the IP address of a computer on the client
side (LAN). The problem is that port forwarding only forwards a service to a single LAN IP
address. In order to use the same service on a different LAN computer, you have to manually
replace the LAN computer's IP address in the forwarding port with another LAN computer's IP
address.
Trigger port forwarding solves this problem by allowing computers on the LAN to
dynamically take turns using the service. The NBG334S records the IP address of a LAN
computer that sends traffic to the WAN to request a service with a specific port number and
protocol (a "trigger" port). When the NBG334S's WAN port receives a response with a
specific port number and protocol ("incoming" port), the NBG334S forwards the traffic to the
LAN IP address of the computer that sent the request. After that computer’s connection for
that service closes, another computer on the LAN can use the service in the same manner. This
way you do not need to configure a new IP address each time you want a different LAN
computer to use the application.
10.5.1 Trigger Port Forwarding Example
The following is an example of trigger port forwarding.
version=1
1;name=Battlefield 1942;port=14567,22000,23000-23009,27900,28900
2;name=Call of Duty;port=28960
3;name=Civilization IV;port=2056
4;name=Diablo I and II;port=6112-6119,4000
5;name=Doom 3;port=27666
6;name=F.E.A.R;port=27888
7;name=Final Fantasy XI;port=25,80,110,443,50000-65535
8;name=Guild Wars;port=6112,80
9;name=Half Life;port=6003,7002,27005,27010,27011,27015
10;name=Jedi Knight III: Jedi Academy;port=28060-28062,28070-28081
11;name=Need for Speed: Hot Pursuit 2;port=1230,8511-
8512,27900,28900,61200-61230
12;name=Neverwinter Nights;port=5120-5300,6500,27900,28900
13;name=Quake 2;port=27910
14;name=Quake 3;port=27660,27960
15;name=Rainbow Six 3: Raven Shield;port=7777-7787,8777-8787
16;name=Serious Sam II;port=25600-25605
17;name=Silent Hunter III;port=17997-18003
18;name=Soldier of Fortune II;port=20100-20112
19;name=Starcraft;port=6112-6119,4000
20;name=Star Trek: Elite Force II;port=29250,29256
21;name=SWAT 4;port=10480-10483
22;name=Warcraft II and III;port=6112-6119,4000
23;name=World of Warcraft;port=3724
Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT)
NBG334S User’s Guide
119
Figure 66 Trigger Port Forwarding Process: Example
1 Jane requests a file from the Real Audio server (port 7070).
2 Port 7070 is a “trigger” port and causes the NBG334S to record Jane’s computer IP
address. The NBG334S associates Jane's computer IP address with the "incoming" port
range of 6970-7170.
3 The Real Audio server responds using a port number ranging between 6970-7170.
4 The NBG334S forwards the traffic to Jane’s computer IP address.
5 Only Jane can connect to the Real Audio server until the connection is closed or times
out. The NBG334S times out in three minutes with UDP (User Datagram Protocol), or
two hours with TCP/IP (Transfer Control Protocol/Internet Protocol).
10.5.2 Two Points To Remember About Trigger Ports
1 Trigger events only happen on data that is going coming from inside the NBG334S and
going to the outside.
2 If an application needs a continuous data stream, that port (range) will be tied up so that
another computer on the LAN can’t trigger it.
10.6 NAT Advanced Screen
To change your NBG334S’s trigger port settings, click Network > NAT > Advanced. The
screen appears as shown.
" Only one LAN computer can use a trigger port (range) at a time.
Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT)
NBG334S User’s Guide
120
Figure 67 Network > NAT > Advanced
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 48 Network > NAT > Advanced
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Max NAT/Firewall
Session Per User
Type a number ranging from 1 to 2048 to limit the number of NAT/firewall sessions
that a host can create.
When computers use peer to peer applications, such as file sharing
applications, they may use a large number of NAT sessions.
If you do not
limit the number of NAT sessions a single client can establish, this can result in all
of the available NAT sessions being used. In this case, no additional NAT
sessions can be established, and users may not be able to access the Internet.
Each NAT session establishes a corresponding firewall session. Use this field to
limit the number of NAT/firewall sessions each client computer can establish
through the NBG334S.
If your network has a small number of clients using peer to peer applications, you
can raise this number to ensure that their performance is not degraded by the
number of NAT sessions they can establish. If your network has a large number of
users using peer to peer applications, you can lower this number to ensure no
single client is using all of the available NAT sessions.
Port Triggering
Rules
# This is the rule index number (read-only).
Name Type a unique name (up to 15 characters) for identification purposes. All
characters are permitted - including spaces.
Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT)
NBG334S User’s Guide
121
Incoming Incoming is a port (or a range of ports) that a server on the WAN uses when it
sends out a particular service. The NBG334S forwards the traffic with this port (or
range of ports) to the client computer on the LAN that requested the service.
Start Port Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers.
End Port Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers.
Trigger The trigger port is a port (or a range of ports) that causes (or triggers) the
NBG334S to record the IP address of the LAN computer that sent the traffic to a
server on the WAN.
Start Port Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers.
End Port Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334S.
Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 48 Network > NAT > Advanced
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT)
NBG334S User’s Guide
122
NBG334S User’s Guide
123
CHAPTER 11
Dynamic DNS
11.1 Dynamic DNS Introduction
Dynamic DNS allows you to update your current dynamic IP address with one or many
dynamic DNS services so that anyone can contact you (in NetMeeting, CU-SeeMe, etc.). You
can also access your FTP server or Web site on your own computer using a domain name (for
instance myhost.dhs.org, where myhost is a name of your choice) that will never change
instead of using an IP address that changes each time you reconnect. Your friends or relatives
will always be able to call you even if they don't know your IP address.
First of all, you need to have registered a dynamic DNS account with www.dyndns.org. This is
for people with a dynamic IP from their ISP or DHCP server that would still like to have a
domain name. The Dynamic DNS service provider will give you a password or key.
11.1.1 DynDNS Wildcard
Enabling the wildcard feature for your host causes *.yourhost.dyndns.org to be aliased to the
same IP address as yourhost.dyndns.org. This feature is useful if you want to be able to use,
for example, www.yourhost.dyndns.org and still reach your hostname.
" If you have a private WAN IP address, then you cannot use Dynamic DNS.
11.2 Dynamic DNS Screen
To change your NBG334S’s DDNS, click Network > DDNS. The screen appears as shown.
Chapter 11 Dynamic DNS
NBG334S User’s Guide
124
Figure 68 Dynamic DNS
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 49 Dynamic DNS
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Enable Dynamic DNS Select this check box to use dynamic DNS.
Service Provider Select the name of your Dynamic DNS service provider.
Dynamic DNS Type Select the type of service that you are registered for from your Dynamic DNS
service provider.
Host Name Enter a host names in the field provided. You can specify up to two host
names in the field separated by a comma (",").
User Name Enter your user name.
Password Enter the password assigned to you.
Enable Wildcard
Option
Select the check box to enable DynDNS Wildcard.
Enable off line option This option is available when CustomDNS is selected in the DDNS Type
field. Check with your Dynamic DNS service provider to have traffic
redirected to a URL (that you can specify) while you are off line.
IP Address Update Policy:
Use WAN IP Address Select this option to update the IP address of the host name(s) to the WAN IP
address.
Dynamic DNS server
auto detect IP Address
Select this option to update the IP address of the host name(s) automatically
by the DDNS server. It is recommended that you select this option.
Use specified IP
Address
Type the IP address of the host name(s). Use this if you have a static IP
address.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334S.
Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
125
PART III
Security
Firewall (127)
Content Filtering (133)
126
NBG334S User’s Guide
127
CHAPTER 12
Firewall
This chapter gives some background information on firewalls and explains how to get started
with the NBG334S’s firewall.
12.1 Introduction to ZyXEL’s Firewall
12.1.1 What is a Firewall?
Originally, the term “firewall” referred to a construction technique designed to prevent the
spread of fire from one room to another. The networking term "firewall" is a system or group
of systems that enforces an access-control policy between two networks. It may also be
defined as a mechanism used to protect a trusted network from a network that is not trusted. Of
course, firewalls cannot solve every security problem. A firewall is one of the mechanisms
used to establish a network security perimeter in support of a network security policy. It
should never be the only mechanism or method employed. For a firewall to guard effectively,
you must design and deploy it appropriately. This requires integrating the firewall into a broad
information-security policy. In addition, specific policies must be implemented within the
firewall itself.
12.1.2 Stateful Inspection Firewall
Stateful inspection firewalls restrict access by screening data packets against defined access
rules. They make access control decisions based on IP address and protocol. They also
"inspect" the session data to assure the integrity of the connection and to adapt to dynamic
protocols. These firewalls generally provide the best speed and transparency; however, they
may lack the granular application level access control or caching that some proxies support.
Firewalls, of one type or another, have become an integral part of standard security solutions
for enterprises.
12.1.3 About the NBG334S Firewall
The NBG334S firewall is a stateful inspection firewall and is designed to protect against
Denial of Service attacks when activated (click the General tab under Firewall and then click
the Enable Firewall check box). The NBG334S's purpose is to allow a private Local Area
Network (LAN) to be securely connected to the Internet. The NBG334S can be used to
prevent theft, destruction and modification of data, as well as log events, which may be
important to the security of your network.
Chapter 12 Firewall
NBG334S User’s Guide
128
The NBG334S is installed between the LAN and a broadband modem connecting to the
Internet. This allows it to act as a secure gateway for all data passing between the Internet and
the LAN.
The NBG334S has one Ethernet WAN port and four Ethernet LAN ports, which are used to
physically separate the network into two areas.The WAN (Wide Area Network) port attaches
to the broadband (cable or DSL) modem to the Internet.
The LAN (Local Area Network) port attaches to a network of computers, which needs security
from the outside world. These computers will have access to Internet services such as e-mail,
FTP and the World Wide Web. However, "inbound access" is not allowed (by default) unless
the remote host is authorized to use a specific service.
12.1.4 Guidelines For Enhancing Security With Your Firewall
1 Change the default password via web configurator.
2 Think about access control before you connect to the network in any way, including
attaching a modem to the port.
3 Limit who can access your router.
4 Don't enable any local service (such as SNMP or NTP) that you don't use. Any enabled
service could present a potential security risk. A determined hacker might be able to find
creative ways to misuse the enabled services to access the firewall or the network.
5 For local services that are enabled, protect against misuse. Protect by configuring the
services to communicate only with specific peers, and protect by configuring rules to
block packets for the services at specific interfaces.
6 Protect against IP spoofing by making sure the firewall is active.
7 Keep the firewall in a secured (locked) room.
12.2 Triangle Routes
If an alternate gateway on the LAN has an IP address in the same subnet as the NBG334S’s
LAN IP address, return traffic may not go through the NBG334S. This is called an
asymmetrical or “triangle” route. This causes the NBG334S to reset the connection, as the
connection has not been acknowledged.
You can have the NBG334S permit the use of asymmetrical route topology on the network
(not reset the connection).
Allowing asymmetrical routes may let traffic from the WAN go directly to the LAN without
passing through the NBG334S. A better solution is to use IP alias to put the NBG334S and the
backup gateway on separate subnets.
12.2.1 Triangle Routes and IP Alias
You can use IP alias instead of allowing triangle routes. IP Alias allow you to partition your
network into logical sections over the same interface.
By putting your LAN and Gateway A in different subnets, all returning network traffic must
pass through the NBG334S to your LAN. The following steps describe such a scenario.
Chapter 12 Firewall
NBG334S User’s Guide
129
1 A computer on the LAN initiates a connection by sending a SYN packet to a receiving
server on the WAN.
2 The NBG334S reroutes the packet to Gateway A, which is in Subnet 2.
3 The reply from the WAN goes to the NBG334S.
4 The NBG334S then sends it to the computer on the LAN in Subnet 1.
Figure 69 Using IP Alias to Solve the Triangle Route Problem
12.3 General Firewall Screen
Click Security > Firewall to open the General screen. Use this screen to enable or disable the
NBG334S’s firewall, and set up firewall logs.
Figure 70 Security > Firewall > General l
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 50 Security > Firewall > General
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Enable Firewall Select this check box to activate the firewall. The NBG334S performs access
control and protects against Denial of Service (DoS) attacks when the firewall is
activated.
Packet Direction This is the direction of travel of packets.
Firewall rules are grouped based on the direction of travel of packets to which they
apply.
Chapter 12 Firewall
NBG334S User’s Guide
130
12.4 Services Screen
Click Security > Firewall > Services. The screen appears as shown next.
If an outside user attempts to probe an unsupported port on your NBG334S, an ICMP response
packet is automatically returned. This allows the outside user to know the NBG334S exists.
Use this screen to prevent the ICMP response packet from being sent. This keeps outsiders
from discovering your NBG334S when unsupported ports are probed.
You can also use this screen to enable service blocking, enter/delete/modify the services you
want to block and the date/time you want to block them.
Log Select whether to create a log for packets that are traveling in the selected
direction when the packets are blocked or forwarded.
To log packets related to firewall rules, make sure that Access Control under Log
is selected in the Logs > Log Settings screen.
Apply Click Apply to save the settings.
Reset Click Reset to start configuring this screen again.
Table 50 Security > Firewall > General
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 12 Firewall
NBG334S User’s Guide
131
Figure 71 Security > Firewall > Services
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 51 Security > Firewall > Services
LABEL DESCRIPTION
ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol is a message control and error-reporting
protocol between a host server and a gateway to the Internet. ICMP uses Internet
Protocol (IP) datagrams, but the messages are processed by the TCP/IP software
and directly apparent to the application user.
Respond to Ping
on
The NBG334S will not respond to any incoming Ping requests when Disable is
selected. Select LAN to reply to incoming LAN Ping requests. Select WAN to reply
to incoming WAN Ping requests. Otherwise select LAN & WAN to reply to both
incoming LAN and WAN Ping requests.
Chapter 12 Firewall
NBG334S User’s Guide
132
Do not respond to
requests for
unauthorized
services
Select this option to prevent hackers from finding the NBG334S by probing for
unused ports. If you select this option, the NBG334S will not respond to port
request(s) for unused ports, thus leaving the unused ports and the NBG334S
unseen. By default this option is not selected and the NBG334S will reply with an
ICMP Port Unreachable packet for a port probe on its unused UDP ports, and a
TCP Reset packet for a port probe on its unused TCP ports.
Note that the probing packets must first traverse the NBG334S's firewall
mechanism before reaching this anti-probing mechanism. Therefore if the firewall
mechanism blocks a probing packet, the NBG334S reacts based on the firewall
policy, which by default, is to send a TCP reset packet for a blocked TCP packet.
You can use the command "sys firewall tcprst rst [on|off]" to change this policy.
When the firewall mechanism blocks a UDP packet, it drops the packet without
sending a response packet.
Service Setup
Enable Services
Blocking
Select this check box to enable this feature.
Available
Services
This is a list of pre-defined services (ports) you may prohibit your LAN computers
from using. Select the port you want to block using the drop-down list and click
Add to add the port to the Blocked Services field.
Blocked Services This is a list of services (ports) that will be inaccessible to computers on your LAN
once you enable service blocking.
Custom Port A custom port is a service that is not available in the pre-defined Available
Services list and you must define using the next two fields.
Type Choose the IP port (TCP or UDP) that defines your customized port from the drop
down list box.
Port Number Enter the port number range that defines the service. For example, if you want to
define the Gnutella service, then select TCP type and enter a port range from
6345 to 6349.
Add Select a service from the Available Services drop-down list and then click Add to
add a service to the Blocked Services
Delete Select a service from the Blocked Services list and then click Delete to remove
this service from the list.
Clear All Click Clear All to empty the Blocked Services.
Schedule to Block
Day to Block: Select a check box to configure which days of the week (or everyday) you want
service blocking to be active.
Time of Day to
Block (24-Hour
Format)
Select the time of day you want service blocking to take effect. Configure blocking
to take effect all day by selecting All Day. You can also configure specific times by
selecting From and entering the start time in the Start (hour) and Start (min)
fields and the end time in the End (hour) and End (min) fields. Enter times in 24-
hour format, for example, "3:00pm" should be entered as "15:00".
Misc setting
Bypass Triangle
Route
Select this check box to have the NBG334S firewall ignore the use of triangle
route topology on the network.
Max NAT/Firewall
Session Per User
Type a number ranging from 1 to 2048 to limit the number of NAT/firewall sessions
that a host can create.
Apply Click Apply to save the settings.
Reset Click Reset to start configuring this screen again.
Table 51 Security > Firewall > Services
LABEL DESCRIPTION
NBG334S User’s Guide
133
CHAPTER 13
Content Filtering
This chapter provides a brief overview of content filtering using the embedded web GUI.
13.1 Introduction to Content Filtering
Internet content filtering allows you to create and enforce Internet access policies tailored to
your needs. Content filtering is the ability to block certain web features or specific URL
keywords.
13.2 Restrict Web Features
The NBG334S can block web features such as ActiveX controls, Java applets, cookies and
disable web proxies.
13.3 Days and Times
The NBG334S also allows you to define time periods and days during which the NBG334S
performs content filtering.
13.4 Filter Screen
Click Security > Content Filter to open the Filter screen.
Chapter 13 Content Filtering
NBG334S User’s Guide
134
Figure 72 Security > Content Filter > Filter
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 52 Security > Content Filter > Filter
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Trusted Computer
IP Address
To enable this feature, type an IP address of any one of the computers in your
network that you want to have as a trusted computer. This allows the trusted
computer to have full access to all features that are configured to be blocked by
content filtering.
Leave this field blank to have no trusted computers.
Restrict Web
Features
Select the box(es) to restrict a feature. When you download a page containing a
restricted feature, that part of the web page will appear blank or grayed out.
ActiveX A tool for building dynamic and active Web pages and distributed object
applications. When you visit an ActiveX Web site, ActiveX controls are
downloaded to your browser, where they remain in case you visit the site again.
Java A programming language and development environment for building
downloadable Web components or Internet and intranet business applications of
all kinds.
Cookies Used by Web servers to track usage and provide service based on ID.
Web Proxy A server that acts as an intermediary between a user and the Internet to provide
security, administrative control, and caching service. When a proxy server is
located on the WAN it is possible for LAN users to circumvent content filtering by
pointing to this proxy server.
Keyword Blocking
Enable URL
Keyword Blocking
The NBG334S can block Web sites with URLs that contain certain keywords in
the domain name or IP address. For example, if the keyword "bad" was enabled,
all sites containing this keyword in the domain name or IP address will be
blocked, e.g., URL http://www.website.com/bad.html would be blocked. Select
this check box to enable this feature.
Chapter 13 Content Filtering
NBG334S User’s Guide
135
13.5 Schedule
Use this screen to set the day(s) and time you want the NBG334S to use content filtering.
Click Security > Content Filter > Schedule. The following screen displays.
Figure 73 Security > Content Filter > Schedule
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Keyword Type a keyword in this field. You may use any character (up to 64 characters).
Wildcards are not allowed. You can also enter a numerical IP address.
Keyword List This list displays the keywords already added.
Add Click Add after you have typed a keyword.
Repeat this procedure to add other keywords. Up to 64 keywords are allowed.
When you try to access a web page containing a keyword, you will get a
message telling you that the content filter is blocking this request.
Delete Highlight a keyword in the lower box and click Delete to remove it. The keyword
disappears from the text box after you click Apply.
Clear All Click this button to remove all of the listed keywords.
Denied Access
Message
Enter a message to be displayed when a user tries to access a restricted web
site. The default message is “Please contact your network administrator!!”
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh
Table 52 Security > Content Filter > Filter
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 53 Security > Content Filter > Schedule
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Day to Block Select check boxes for the days that you want the NBG334S to perform
content filtering. Select the Everyday check box to have content filtering
turned on all days of the week.
Time of Day to Block
(24-Hour Format)
Time of Day to Block allows the administrator to define during which time
periods content filtering is enabled. Time of Day to Block restrictions only
apply to the keywords (see above). Restrict web server data, such as ActiveX,
Java, Cookies and Web Proxy are not affected.
Select All Day to have content filtering always active on the days selected in
Day to Block with time of day limitations not enforced.
Select From and enter the time period, in 24-hour format, during which
content filtering will be enforced.
Chapter 13 Content Filtering
NBG334S User’s Guide
136
13.6 Customizing Keyword Blocking URL Checking
You can use commands to set how much of a website’s URL the content filter is to check for
keyword blocking. See the appendices for information on how to access and use the command
interpreter.
13.6.1 Domain Name or IP Address URL Checking
By default, the NBG334S checks the URL’s domain name or IP address when performing
keyword blocking.
This means that the NBG334S checks the characters that come before the first slash in the
URL.
For example, with the URL www.zyxel.com.tw/news/pressroom.php
, content filtering only
searches for keywords within www.zyxel.com.tw
.
13.6.2 Full Path URL Checking
Full path URL checking has the NBG334S check the characters that come before the last slash
in the URL.
For example, with the URL www.zyxel.com.tw/news/pressroom.php
, full path URL checking
searches for keywords within www.zyxel.com.tw/news/
.
Use the ip urlfilter customize actionFlags 6 [disable | enable]
command to extend (or not extend) the keyword blocking search to include the URL's full
path.
13.6.3 File Name URL Checking
Filename URL checking has the NBG334S check all of the characters in the URL.
For example, filename URL checking searches for keywords within the URL
www.zyxel.com.tw/news/pressroom.php
.
Use the ip urlfilter customize actionFlags 8 [disable | enable]
command to extend (or not extend) the keyword blocking search to include the URL's
complete filename.
Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen.
Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh
Table 53 Security > Content Filter > Schedule
LABEL DESCRIPTION
137
PART IV
Management
Static Route Screens (139)
Bandwidth Management (143)
Remote Management (153)
Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) (159)
138
NBG334S User’s Guide
139
CHAPTER 14
Static Route Screens
This chapter shows you how to configure static routes for your NBG334S.
14.1 Static Route Overview
Each remote node specifies only the network to which the gateway is directly connected, and
the NBG334S has no knowledge of the networks beyond. For instance, the NBG334S knows
about network N2 in the following figure through remote node router R1. However, the
NBG334S is unable to route a packet to network N3 because it doesn't know that there is a
route through the same remote node router R1 (via gateway router R2). The static routes are
for you to tell the NBG334S about the networks beyond the remote nodes.
Figure 74 Example of Static Routing Topology
14.2 IP Static Route Screen
Click Management > Static Route to open the IP Static Route screen. The following screen
displays.
Chapter 14 Static Route Screens
NBG334S User’s Guide
140
Figure 75 Management > Static Route > IP Static Route
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
14.2.1 Static Route Setup Screen
To edit a static route, click the edit icon under Modify. The following screen displays. Fill in
the required information for each static route.
Table 54 Management > Static Route > IP Static Route
LABEL DESCRIPTION
# This is the index number of an individual static route. The first entry is for the
default route and not editable.
Name This is the name that describes or identifies this route.
Active This icon is turned on when this static route is active.
Click the Edit icon under Modify and select the Active checkbox in the Static
Route Setup screen to enable the static route. Clear the checkbox to disable this
static route without having to delete the entry.
Destination This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination. Routing
is always based on network number.
Gateway This is the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is an immediate neighbor of
your NBG334S that will forward the packet to the destination. On the LAN, the
gateway must be a router on the same segment as your NBG334S; over the
WAN, the gateway must be the IP address of one of the remote nodes.
Modify Click the Edit icon to open the static route setup screen. Modify a static route or
create a new static route in the Static Route Setup screen.
Click the Remove icon to delete a static route.
Chapter 14 Static Route Screens
NBG334S User’s Guide
141
Figure 76 Management > Static Route > IP Static Route: Static Route Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 55 Management > Static Route > IP Static Route: Static Route Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Route Name Enter the name of the IP static route. Leave this field blank to delete this static
route.
Active This field allows you to activate/deactivate this static route.
Private This parameter determines if the NBG334S will include this route to a remote node
in its RIP broadcasts.
Select this check box to keep this route private and not included in RIP
broadcasts. Clear this checkbox to propagate this route to other hosts through RIP
broadcasts.
Destination IP
Address
This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination. Routing is
always based on network number. If you need to specify a route to a single host,
use a subnet mask of 255.255.255.255 in the subnet mask field to force the
network number to be identical to the host ID.
IP Subnet Mask Enter the IP subnet mask here.
Gateway IP
Address
Enter the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is an immediate neighbor of
your NBG334S that will forward the packet to the destination. On the LAN, the
gateway must be a router on the same segment as your NBG334S; over the WAN,
the gateway must be the IP address of one of the Remote Nodes.
Metric Metric represents the “cost” of transmission for routing purposes. IP routing uses
hop count as the measurement of cost, with a minimum of 1 for directly connected
networks. Enter a number that approximates the cost for this link. The number
need not be precise, but it must be between 1 and 15. In practice, 2 or 3 is usually
a good number.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334S.
Cancel Click Cancel to return to the previous screen and not save your changes.
Chapter 14 Static Route Screens
NBG334S User’s Guide
142
NBG334S User’s Guide
143
CHAPTER 15
Bandwidth Management
This chapter contains information about configuring bandwidth management, editing rules and
viewing the NBG334S’s bandwidth management logs.
15.1 Bandwidth Management Overview
ZyXEL’s Bandwidth Management allows you to specify bandwidth management rules based
on an application and/or subnet. You can allocate specific amounts of bandwidth capacity
(bandwidth budgets) to different bandwidth rules.
The NBG334S applies bandwidth management to traffic that it forwards out through an
interface. The NBG334S does not control the bandwidth of traffic that comes into an interface.
Bandwidth management applies to all traffic flowing out of the router, regardless of the
traffic's source.
Traffic redirect or IP alias may cause LAN-to-LAN traffic to pass through the NBG334S and
be managed by bandwidth management.
• The sum of the bandwidth allotments that apply to the WAN interface (LAN to WAN,
WLAN to WAN, WAN to WAN / NBG334S) must be less than or equal to the Upstream
Bandwidth that you configure in the Bandwidth Management Advanced screen.
• The sum of the bandwidth allotments that apply to the LAN port (WAN to LAN, WLAN
to LAN, LAN to LAN / NBG334S) must be less than or equal to 100,000 kbps (you
cannot configure the bandwidth budget for the LAN port).
• The sum of the bandwidth allotments that apply to the WLAN port (LAN to WLAN,
WAN to WLAN, WLAN to WLAN / NBG334S) must be less than or equal to 54,000
kbps (you cannot configure the bandwidth budget for the WLAN port).
15.2 Application-based Bandwidth Management
You can create bandwidth classes based on individual applications (like VoIP, Web, FTP, E-
mail and Video for example).
15.3 Subnet-based Bandwidth Management
You can create bandwidth classes based on subnets.
Chapter 15 Bandwidth Management
NBG334S User’s Guide
144
The following figure shows LAN subnets. You could configure one bandwidth class for
subnet A and another for subnet B.
Figure 77 Subnet-based Bandwidth Management Example
15.4 Application and Subnet-based Bandwidth Management
You could also create bandwidth classes based on a combination of a subnet and an
application. The following example table shows bandwidth allocations for application specific
traffic from separate LAN subnets.
15.5 Bandwidth Management Priorities
The following table describes the priorities that you can apply to traffic that the NBG334S
forwards out through an interface.
Table 56 Application and Subnet-based Bandwidth Management Example
TRAFFIC TYPE FROM SUBNET A FROM SUBNET B
VoIP 64 Kbps 64 Kbps
Web 64 Kbps 64 Kbps
FTP 64 Kbps 64 Kbps
E-mail 64 Kbps 64 Kbps
Video 64 Kbps 64 Kbps
Table 57 Bandwidth Management Priorities
PRIORITY LEVELS: TRAFFIC WITH A HIGHER PRIORITY GETS THROUGH FASTER WHILE
TRAFFIC WITH A LOWER PRIORITY IS DROPPED IF THE NETWORK IS CONGESTED.
High Typically used for voice traffic or video that is especially sensitive to jitter (jitter
is the variations in delay).
Chapter 15 Bandwidth Management
NBG334S User’s Guide
145
15.6 Predefined Bandwidth Management Services
The following is a description of the services that you can select and to which you can apply
media bandwidth management using the wizard screens.
Mid Typically used for “excellent effort” or better than best effort and would include
important business traffic that can tolerate some delay.
Low This is typically used for non-critical “background” traffic such as bulk
transfers that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and
users.
Table 57 Bandwidth Management Priorities
PRIORITY LEVELS: TRAFFIC WITH A HIGHER PRIORITY GETS THROUGH FASTER WHILE
TRAFFIC WITH A LOWER PRIORITY IS DROPPED IF THE NETWORK IS CONGESTED.
Table 58 Media Bandwidth Management Setup: Services
SERVICE DESCRIPTION
Xbox Live This is Microsoft’s online gaming service that lets you play multiplayer Xbox
games on the Internet via broadband technology. Xbox Live uses port 3074.
VoIP (SIP) Sending voice signals over the Internet is called Voice over IP or VoIP. Session
Initiated Protocol (SIP) is an internationally recognized standard for implementing
VoIP. SIP is an application-layer control (signaling) protocol that handles the
setting up, altering and tearing down of voice and multimedia sessions over the
Internet.
SIP is transported primarily over UDP but can also be transported over TCP,
using the default port number 5060.
FTP File Transfer Program enables fast transfer of files, including large files that may
not be possible by e-mail. FTP uses port number 21.
E-Mail Electronic mail consists of messages sent through a computer network to specific
groups or individuals. Here are some default ports for e-mail:
POP3 - port 110
IMAP - port 143
SMTP - port 25
HTTP - port 80
BitTorrent BitTorrent is a free P2P (peer-to-peer) sharing tool allowing you to distribute large
software and media files using ports 6881 to 6889. BitTorrent requires you to
search for a file with a searching engine yourself. It distributes files by corporation
and trading, that is, the client downloads the file in small pieces and share the
pieces with other peers to get other half of the file.
MSN Webcam MSN messenger allows you to chat online and send instant messages. If you use
MSN messenger and also have a webcam, you can send your image/photo in
real-time along with messages
WWW The World Wide Web (WWW) is an Internet system to distribute graphical, hyper-
linked information, based on Hyper Text Transfer Protocol (HTTP) - a client/server
protocol for the World Wide Web. The Web is not synonymous with the Internet;
rather, it is just one service on the Internet. Other services on the Internet include
Internet Relay Chat and Newsgroups. The Web is accessed through use of a
browser.
Chapter 15 Bandwidth Management
NBG334S User’s Guide
146
15.6.1 Services and Port Numbers
The commonly used services and port numbers are shown in the following table. Please refer
to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers. Next to the name of the service, two
fields appear in brackets. The first field indicates the IP protocol type (TCP, UDP, or ICMP).
The second field indicates the IP port number that defines the service. (Note that there may be
more than one IP protocol type. For example, look at the DNS service.
(UDP/TCP:53) means
UDP port 53 and TCP port 53.
Chapter 15 Bandwidth Management
NBG334S User’s Guide
147
Table 59 Commonly Used Services
SERVICE DESCRIPTION
AIM/New-ICQ(TCP:5190) AOL’s Internet Messenger service, used as a listening port by ICQ.
AUTH(TCP:113) Authentication protocol used by some servers.
BGP(TCP:179) Border Gateway Protocol.
BOOTP_CLIENT(UDP:68) DHCP Client.
BOOTP_SERVER(UDP:67) DHCP Server.
CU-SEEME(TCP/UDP:7648,
24032)
A popular videoconferencing solution from White Pines Software.
DNS(UDP/TCP:53) Domain Name Server, a service that matches web names (e.g.
www.zyxel.com
) to IP numbers.
FINGER(TCP:79) Finger is a UNIX or Internet related command that can be used to
find out if a user is logged on.
FTP(TCP:20.21) File Transfer Program, a program to enable fast transfer of files,
including large files that may not be possible by e-mail.
H.323(TCP:1720) NetMeeting uses this protocol.
HTTP(TCP:80) Hyper Text Transfer Protocol - a client/server protocol for the world
wide web.
HTTPS(TCP:443) HTTPS is a secured http session often used in e-commerce.
ICQ(UDP:4000) This is a popular Internet chat program.
IKE(UDP:500) The Internet Key Exchange algorithm is used for key distribution and
management.
IPSEC_TUNNEL(AH:0) The IPSEC AH (Authentication Header) tunneling protocol uses this
service.
IPSEC_TUNNEL(ESP:0) The IPSEC ESP (Encapsulation Security Protocol) tunneling protocol
uses this service.
IRC(TCP/UDP:6667) This is another popular Internet chat program.
MSN Messenger(TCP:1863) Microsoft Networks’ messenger service uses this protocol.
MULTICAST(IGMP:0) Internet Group Multicast Protocol is used when sending packets to a
specific group of hosts.
NEW-ICQ(TCP:5190) An Internet chat program.
NEWS(TCP:144) A protocol for news groups.
NFS(UDP:2049) Network File System - NFS is a client/server distributed file service
that provides transparent file sharing for network environments.
NNTP(TCP:119) Network News Transport Protocol is the delivery mechanism for the
USENET newsgroup service.
PING(ICMP:0) Packet INternet Groper is a protocol that sends out ICMP echo
requests to test whether or not a remote host is reachable.
POP3(TCP:110) Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a client computer get e-mail from a
POP3 server through a temporary connection (TCP/IP or other).
PPTP(TCP:1723) Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data
over public networks. This is the control channel.
PPTP_TUNNEL(GRE:0) Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data
over public networks. This is the data channel.
RCMD(TCP:512) Remote Command Service.
REAL_AUDIO(TCP:7070) A streaming audio service that enables real time sound over the web.
Chapter 15 Bandwidth Management
NBG334S User’s Guide
148
15.7 Default Bandwidth Management Classes and Priorities
If you enable bandwidth management but do not configure a rule for critical traffic like VoIP,
the voice traffic may then get delayed due to insufficient bandwidth. With the automatic traffic
classifier feature activated, the NBG334S automatically assigns a default bandwidth
management class and priority to traffic that does not match any of the user-defined rules. The
traffic is classified based on the traffic type. Real-time traffic always gets higher priority over
other traffic.
The following table shows you the priorities between the three default classes (AutoClass_H,
AutoClass_M and Default Class) and user-defined rules. 6 is the highest priority.
REXEC(TCP:514) Remote Execution Daemon.
RLOGIN(TCP:513) Remote Login.
RTELNET(TCP:107) Remote Telnet.
RTSP(TCP/UDP:554) The Real Time Streaming (media control) Protocol (RTSP) is a
remote control for multimedia on the Internet.
SFTP(TCP:115) Simple File Transfer Protocol.
SMTP(TCP:25) Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the message-exchange standard for
the Internet. SMTP enables you to move messages from one e-mail
server to another.
SNMP(TCP/UDP:161) Simple Network Management Program.
SNMP-TRAPS(TCP/UDP:162) Traps for use with the SNMP (RFC:1215).
SQL-NET(TCP:1521) Structured Query Language is an interface to access data on many
different types of database systems, including mainframes, midrange
systems, UNIX systems and network servers.
SSH(TCP/UDP:22) Secure Shell Remote Login Program.
STRM WORKS(UDP:1558) Stream Works Protocol.
SYSLOG(UDP:514) Syslog allows you to send system logs to a UNIX server.
TACACS(UDP:49) Login Host Protocol used for (Terminal Access Controller Access
Control System).
TELNET(TCP:23) Telnet is the login and terminal emulation protocol common on the
Internet and in UNIX environments. It operates over TCP/IP
networks. Its primary function is to allow users to log into remote host
systems.
TFTP(UDP:69) Trivial File Transfer Protocol is an Internet file transfer protocol
similar to FTP, but uses the UDP (User Datagram Protocol) rather
than TCP (Transmission Control Protocol).
VDOLIVE(TCP:7000) Another videoconferencing solution.
Table 59 Commonly Used Services
SERVICE DESCRIPTION
Table 60 Bandwidth Management Priority with Default Classes
CLASS TYPE PRIORITY
User-defined with high priority 6
AutoClass_H 5
User-defined with medium priority 4
Chapter 15 Bandwidth Management
NBG334S User’s Guide
149
15.8 Bandwidth Management General Configuration
Click Management > Bandwidth MGMT to open the bandwidth management General
screen.
Figure 78 Management > Bandwidth MGMT > General
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
15.9 Bandwidth Management Advanced Configuration
Click Management > Bandwidth MGMT > Advanced to open the bandwidth management
Advanced screen.
AutoClass_M 3
User-defined with low priority 2
Default Class 1
Table 60 Bandwidth Management Priority with Default Classes
CLASS TYPE PRIORITY
Table 61 Management > Bandwidth MGMT > General
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Enable Bandwidth
Management
Select this check box to have the NBG334S apply bandwidth management.
Enable bandwidth management to give traffic that matches a bandwidth rule
priority over traffic that does not match a bandwidth rule.
Enabling bandwidth management also allows you to control the maximum or
minimum amounts of bandwidth that can be used by traffic that matches a
bandwidth rule.
Enable Automatic
Traffic Classifier
This field is only applicable when you select the Enable Bandwidth
Management check box.
Select this check box to have the NBG334S base on the default bandwidth
classes to apply bandwidth management. Real-time packets, such as VoIP
traffic always get higher priority.
Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings.
Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 15 Bandwidth Management
NBG334S User’s Guide
150
Figure 79 Management > Bandwidth MGMT > Advanced
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 62 Management > Bandwidth MGMT > Advanced
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Check my
upstream
bandwidth
Click the Detection button to check the size of your upstream bandwidth.
Upstream
Bandwidth (kbps)
Enter the amount of bandwidth in kbps (2 to 100,000) that you want to allocate for
traffic. 20 kbps to 20,000 kbps is recommended.
The recommendation is to set this speed to be equal to or less than the speed of
the broadband device connected to the WAN port. For example, set the speed to
1000 Kbps (or less) if the broadband device connected to the WAN port has an
upstream speed of 1000 Kbps.
Application List Use this table to allocate specific amounts of bandwidth based on the pre-defined
service.
# This is the number of an individual bandwidth management rule.
Enable Select this check box to have the NBG334S apply this bandwidth management
rule.
Service This is the name of the service.
Priority Select a priority from the drop down list box. Choose High, Mid or Low.
Advanced Setting Click the Edit icon to open the Rule Configuration screen where you can modify
the rule.
User-defined
Service
Use this table to allocate specific amounts of bandwidth to specific applications
and/or subnets.
# This is the number of an individual bandwidth management rule.
Chapter 15 Bandwidth Management
NBG334S User’s Guide
151
15.9.1 Rule Configuration
If you want to edit a bandwidth management rule for other applications and/or subnets, click
the Edit icon in the Application List or User-defined Service table of the Advanced screen.
The following screen displays.
Figure 80 Management > Bandwidth MGMT > Advanced: User-defined Service Rule
Configuration
The following table describes the labels in this screen
Table 63 Management > Bandwidth MGMT > Advanced: User-defined Service Rule
Enable Select this check box to have the NBG334S apply this bandwidth management
rule.
Direction Select To LAN to apply bandwidth management to traffic that the NBG334S
forwards to the LAN.
Select To WAN to apply bandwidth management to traffic that the NBG334S
forwards to the WAN.
Select To WLAN to apply bandwidth management to traffic that the NBG334S
forwards to the WLAN.
Service Name Enter a descriptive name of up to 19 alphanumeric characters, including spaces.
Priority Select a priority from the drop down list box. Choose High, Mid or Low.
Modify Click the Edit icon to open the Rule Configuration screen. Modify an existing rule
or create a new rule in the Rule Configuration screen. See Section 15.9.1 on
page 151 for more information.
Click the Remove icon to delete a rule.
Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings.
Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 62 Management > Bandwidth MGMT > Advanced (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 15 Bandwidth Management
NBG334S User’s Guide
152
Configuration
15.10 Bandwidth Management Monitor
Click Management > Bandwidth MGMT > Monitor to open the bandwidth management
Monitor screen. View the bandwidth usage of the WAN configured bandwidth rules. This is
also shown as bandwidth usage over the bandwidth budget for each rule. The gray section of
the bar represents the percentage of unused bandwidth and the blue color represents the
percentage of bandwidth in use.
Figure 81 Management > Bandwidth MGMT > Monitor
LABEL DESCRIPTION
BW Budget Select Maximum Bandwidth or Minimum Bandwidth and specify the maximum
or minimum bandwidth allowed for the rule in kilobits per second.
Destination
Address
Enter the destination IP address in dotted decimal notation.
Destination
Subnet Netmask
Enter the destination subnet mask. This field is N/A if you do not specify a
Destination Address. Refer to the appendices for more information on IP
subnetting.
Destination Port Enter the port number of the destination. See Table 59 on page 147 for some
common services and port numbers.
Source Address Enter the source IP address in dotted decimal notation.
Source Subnet
Netmask
Enter the destination subnet mask. This field is N/A if you do not specify a Source
Address. Refer to the appendices for more information on IP subnetting.
Source Port Enter the port number of the source. See Table 59 on page 147 for some common
services and port numbers.
Protocol Select the protocol (TCP or UDP) or select User defined and enter the protocol
(service type) number.
OK Click OK to save your customized settings.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
NBG334S User’s Guide
153
CHAPTER 16
Remote Management
This chapter provides information on the Remote Management screens.
16.1 Remote Management Overview
Remote management allows you to determine which services/protocols can access which
NBG334S interface (if any) from which computers.
" When you configure remote management to allow management from the
WAN, you still need to configure a firewall rule to allow access. See the firewall
chapters for details on configuring firewall rules.
You may manage your NBG334S from a remote location via:
" When you choose WAN or LAN & WAN, you still need to configure a firewall
rule to allow access.
To disable remote management of a service, select Disable in the corresponding Server
Access field.
You may only have one remote management session running at a time. The NBG334S
automatically disconnects a remote management session of lower priority when another
remote management session of higher priority starts. The priorities for the different types of
remote management sessions are as follows.
1 Telnet
2 HTTP
16.1.1 Remote Management Limitations
Remote management over LAN or WAN will not work when:
• Internet (WAN only) • ALL (LAN and WAN)
• LAN only • Neither (Disable).
Chapter 16 Remote Management
NBG334S User’s Guide
154
1 You have disabled that service in one of the remote management screens.
2 The IP address in the Secured Client IP Address field does not match the client IP
address. If it does not match, the NBG334S will disconnect the session immediately.
3 There is already another remote management session with an equal or higher priority
running. You may only have one remote management session running at one time.
4 There is a firewall rule that blocks it.
16.1.2 Remote Management and NAT
When NAT is enabled:
• Use the NBG334S’s WAN IP address when configuring from the WAN.
• Use the NBG334S’s LAN IP address when configuring from the LAN.
16.1.3 System Timeout
There is a default system management idle timeout of five minutes (three hundred seconds).
The NBG334S automatically logs you out if the management session remains idle for longer
than this timeout period. The management session does not time out when a statistics screen is
polling. You can change the timeout period in the System screen
16.2 WWW Screen
To change your NBG334S’s World Wide Web settings, click Management > Remote
MGMT to display the WWW screen.
Figure 82 Management > Remote MGMT > WWW
The following table describes the labels in this screen
Table 64 Management > Remote MGMT > WWW
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Server Port You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must
use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management.
Server Access Select the interface(s) through which a computer may access the NBG334S using
this service.
Chapter 16 Remote Management
NBG334S User’s Guide
155
16.3 Telnet
You can configure your NBG334S for remote Telnet access as shown next. The administrator
uses Telnet from a computer on a remote network to access the NBG334S.
Figure 83 Telnet Configuration on a TCP/IP Network
16.4 Telnet Screen
To change your NBG334S’s Telnet settings, click Management > Remote MGMT > Te lne t .
The following screen displays.
Figure 84 Management > Remote MGMT > Telnet
Secured Client IP
Address
A secured client is a “trusted” computer that is allowed to communicate with the
NBG334S using this service.
Select All to allow any computer to access the NBG334S using this service.
Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to
access the NBG334S using this service.
Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen.
Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 16 Remote Management
NBG334S User’s Guide
156
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
16.5 FTP Screen
You can upload and download the NBG334S’s firmware and configuration files using FTP,
please see the chapter on firmware and configuration file maintenance for details. To use this
feature, your computer must have an FTP client.
To change your NBG334S’s FTP settings, click Management > Remote MGMT > FTP. The
screen appears as shown.
Figure 85 Management > Remote MGMT > FTP
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 65 Management > Remote MGMT > Telnet
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Server Port You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must
use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management.
Server Access Select the interface(s) through which a computer may access the NBG334S using
this service.
Secured Client
IP Address
A secured client is a “trusted” computer that is allowed to communicate with the
NBG334S using this service.
Select All to allow any computer to access the NBG334S using this service.
Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to
access the NBG334S using this service.
Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen.
Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 66 Management > Remote MGMT > FTP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Server Port You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must
use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management.
Server Access Select the interface(s) through which a computer may access the NBG334S using
this service.
Secured Client IP
Address
A secured client is a “trusted” computer that is allowed to communicate with the
NBG334S using this service.
Select All to allow any computer to access the NBG334S using this service.
Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to
access the NBG334S using this service.
Chapter 16 Remote Management
NBG334S User’s Guide
157
16.6 DNS Screen
Use DNS (Domain Name System) to map a domain name to its corresponding IP address and
vice versa. Refer to the chapter on Wizard Setup for background information.
To change your NBG334S’s DNS settings, click Management > Remote MGMT > DNS.
The screen appears as shown.
Figure 86 Management > Remote MGMT > DNS
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen.
Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 66 Management > Remote MGMT > FTP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Table 67 Management > Remote MGMT > DNS
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Server Port The DNS service port number is 53 and cannot be changed here.
Server Access Select the interface(s) through which a computer may send DNS queries to the
NBG334S.
Secured Client IP
Address
A secured client is a “trusted” computer that is allowed to send DNS queries to the
NBG334S.
Select All to allow any computer to send DNS queries to the NBG334S.
Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to
send DNS queries to the NBG334S.
Apply Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen.
Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 16 Remote Management
NBG334S User’s Guide
158
NBG334S User’s Guide
159
CHAPTER 17
Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
This chapter introduces the UPnP feature in the web configurator.
17.1 Introducing Universal Plug and Play
Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) is a distributed, open networking standard that uses TCP/IP
for simple peer-to-peer network connectivity between devices. A UPnP device can
dynamically join a network, obtain an IP address, convey its capabilities and learn about other
devices on the network. In turn, a device can leave a network smoothly and automatically
when it is no longer in use.
See Section 17.3 on page 160 for configuration instructions.
17.1.1 How do I know if I'm using UPnP?
UPnP hardware is identified as an icon in the Network Connections folder (Windows XP).
Each UPnP compatible device installed on your network will appear as a separate icon.
Selecting the icon of a UPnP device will allow you to access the information and properties of
that device.
17.1.2 NAT Traversal
UPnP NAT traversal automates the process of allowing an application to operate through
NAT. UPnP network devices can automatically configure network addressing, announce their
presence in the network to other UPnP devices and enable exchange of simple product and
service descriptions. NAT traversal allows the following:
• Dynamic port mapping
• Learning public IP addresses
• Assigning lease times to mappings
Windows Messenger is an example of an application that supports NAT traversal and UPnP.
See the NAT chapter for more information on NAT.
17.1.3 Cautions with UPnP
The automated nature of NAT traversal applications in establishing their own services and
opening firewall ports may present network security issues. Network information and
configuration may also be obtained and modified by users in some network environments.
Chapter 17 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
NBG334S User’s Guide
160
When a UPnP device joins a network, it announces its presence with a multicast message. For
security reasons, the NBG334S allows multicast messages on the LAN only.
All UPnP-enabled devices may communicate freely with each other without additional
configuration. Disable UPnP if this is not your intention.
17.2 UPnP and ZyXEL
ZyXEL has achieved UPnP certification from the Universal Plug and Play Forum UPnP™
Implementers Corp. (UIC). ZyXEL's UPnP implementation supports Internet Gateway Device
(IGD) 1.0.
See the following sections for examples of installing and using UPnP.
17.3 UPnP Screen
Click the Management > UPnP to display the UPnP screen.
Figure 87 Management > UPnP > General
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 68 Management > UPnP > General
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Enable the Universal Plug
and Play (UPnP) Feature
Select this check box to activate UPnP. Be aware that anyone could
use a UPnP application to open the web configurator's login screen
without entering the NBG334S's IP address (although you must still
enter the password to access the web configurator).
Allow users to make
configuration changes
through UPnP
Select this check box to allow UPnP-enabled applications to
automatically configure the NBG334S so that they can communicate
through the NBG334S, for example by using NAT traversal, UPnP
applications automatically reserve a NAT forwarding port in order to
communicate with another UPnP enabled device; this eliminates the
need to manually configure port forwarding for the UPnP enabled
application.
Allow UPnP to pass through
Firewall
Select this check box to allow traffic from UPnP-enabled applications to
bypass the firewall.
Clear this check box to have the firewall block all UPnP application
packets (for example, MSN packets).
Chapter 17 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
NBG334S User’s Guide
161
17.4 Installing UPnP in Windows Example
This section shows how to install UPnP in Windows Me and Windows XP.
17.4.0.1 Installing UPnP in Windows Me
Follow the steps below to install the UPnP in Windows Me.
1 Click Start and Control Panel. Double-click Add/Remove Programs.
2 Click on the Windows Setup tab and select Communication in the Components
selection box. Click Details.
Figure 88 Add/Remove Programs: Windows Setup: Communication
3 In the Communications window, select the Universal Plug and Play check box in the
Components selection box.
Apply Click Apply to save the setting to the NBG334S.
Cancel Click Cancel to return to the previously saved settings.
Table 68 Management > UPnP > General
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 17 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
NBG334S User’s Guide
162
Figure 89 Add/Remove Programs: Windows Setup: Communication: Components
4 Click OK to go back to the Add/Remove Programs Properties window and click
Next.
5 Restart the computer when prompted.
Installing UPnP in Windows XP
Follow the steps below to install the UPnP in Windows XP.
1 Click Start and Control Panel.
2 Double-click Network Connections.
3 In the Network Connections window, click Advanced in the main menu and select
Optional Networking Components ….
Figure 90 Network Connections
4 The Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard window displays. Select
Networking Service in the Components selection box and click Details.
Chapter 17 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
NBG334S User’s Guide
163
Figure 91 Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard
5 In the Networking Services window, select the Universal Plug and Play check box.
Figure 92 Networking Services
6 Click OK to go back to the Windows Optional Networking Component Wizard
window and click Next.
Chapter 17 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
NBG334S User’s Guide
164
17.4.0.2 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example
This section shows you how to use the UPnP feature in Windows XP. You must already have
UPnP installed in Windows XP and UPnP activated on the NBG334S.
Make sure the computer is connected to a LAN port of the NBG334S. Turn on your computer
and the NBG334S.
Auto-discover Your UPnP-enabled Network Device
1 Click Start and Control Panel. Double-click Network Connections. An icon displays
under Internet Gateway.
2 Right-click the icon and select Properties.
Figure 93 Network Connections
3 In the Internet Connection Properties window, click Settings to see the port mappings
there were automatically created.
Chapter 17 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
NBG334S User’s Guide
165
Figure 94 Internet Connection Properties
4 You may edit or delete the port mappings or click Add to manually add port mappings.
Chapter 17 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
NBG334S User’s Guide
166
Figure 95 Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings
Figure 96 Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings: Add
5 When the UPnP-enabled device is disconnected from your computer, all port mappings
will be deleted automatically.
6 Select Show icon in notification area when connected option and click OK. An icon
displays in the system tray.
Chapter 17 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
NBG334S User’s Guide
167
Figure 97 System Tray Icon
7 Double-click on the icon to display your current Internet connection status.
Figure 98 Internet Connection Status
Web Configurator Easy Access
With UPnP, you can access the web-based configurator on the NBG334S without finding out
the IP address of the NBG334S first. This comes helpful if you do not know the IP address of
the NBG334S.
Follow the steps below to access the web configurator.
1 Click Start and then Control Panel.
2 Double-click Network Connections.
3 Select My Network Places under Other Places.
Chapter 17 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
NBG334S User’s Guide
168
Figure 99 Network Connections
4 An icon with the description for each UPnP-enabled device displays under Local
Network.
5 Right-click on the icon for your NBG334S and select Invoke. The web configurator
login screen displays.
Chapter 17 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
NBG334S User’s Guide
169
Figure 100 Network Connections: My Network Places
6 Right-click on the icon for your NBG334S and select Properties. A properties window
displays with basic information about the NBG334S.
Figure 101 Network Connections: My Network Places: Properties: Example
Chapter 17 Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)
NBG334S User’s Guide
170
171
PART V
Maintenance and
Troubleshooting
System (173)
Logs (177)
Tools (191)
Configuration Mode (197)
Sys Op Mode (199)
Troubleshooting (203)
172
NBG334S User’s Guide
173
CHAPTER 18
System
This chapter provides information on the System screens.
18.1 System Overview
See the chapter about wizard setup for more information on the next few screens.
18.2 System General Screen
Click Maintenance > System. The following screen displays.
Figure 102 Maintenance > System > General
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 69 Maintenance > System > General
LABEL DESCRIPTION
System Name System Name is a unique name to identify the NBG334S in an Ethernet network.
It is recommended you enter your computer’s “Computer name” in this field (see
the chapter about wizard setup for how to find your computer’s name).
This name can be up to 30 alphanumeric characters long. Spaces are not
allowed, but dashes “-” and underscores "_" are accepted.
Domain Name Enter the domain name (if you know it) here. If you leave this field blank, the ISP
may assign a domain name via DHCP.
The domain name entered by you is given priority over the ISP assigned domain
name.
Chapter 18 System
NBG334S User’s Guide
174
18.3 Time Setting Screen
To change your NBG334S’s time and date, click Maintenance > System > Time Setting. The
screen appears as shown. Use this screen to configure the NBG334S’s time based on your
local time zone.
Figure 103 Maintenance > System > Time Setting
Administrator
Inactivity Timer
Type how many minutes a management session can be left idle before the
session times out. The default is 5 minutes. After it times out you have to log in
with your password again. Very long idle timeouts may have security risks. A
value of "0" means a management session never times out, no matter how long it
has been left idle (not recommended).
Password Setup Change your NBG334S’s password (recommended) using the fields as shown.
Old Password Type the default password or the existing password you use to access the
system in this field.
New Password Type your new system password (up to 30 characters). Note that as you type a
password, the screen displays an asterisk (*) for each character you type.
Retype to Confirm Type the new password again in this field.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334S.
Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 69 Maintenance > System > General
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 18 System
NBG334S User’s Guide
175
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 70 Maintenance > System > Time Setting
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Current Time and
Date
Current Time This field displays the time of your NBG334S.
Each time you reload this page, the NBG334S synchronizes the time with the
time server.
Current Date This field displays the date of your NBG334S.
Each time you reload this page, the NBG334S synchronizes the date with the
time server.
Time and Date
Setup
Manual Select this radio button to enter the time and date manually. If you configure a
new time and date, Time Zone and Daylight Saving at the same time, the new
time and date you entered has priority and the Time Zone and Daylight Saving
settings do not affect it.
New Time
(hh:mm:ss)
This field displays the last updated time from the time server or the last time
configured manually.
When you set Time and Date Setup to Manual, enter the new time in this field
and then click Apply.
New Date
(yyyy/mm/dd)
This field displays the last updated date from the time server or the last date
configured manually.
When you set Time and Date Setup to Manual, enter the new date in this field
and then click Apply.
Get from Time
Server
Select this radio button to have the NBG334S get the time and date from the
time server you specified below.
Auto Select Auto to have the NBG334S automatically search for an available time
server and synchronize the date and time with the time server after you click
Apply.
User Defined Time
Server Address
Select User Defined Time Server Address and enter the IP address or URL
(up to 20 extended ASCII characters in length) of your time server. Check with
your ISP/network administrator if you are unsure of this information.
Time Zone Setup
Time Zone Choose the time zone of your location. This will set the time difference between
your time zone and Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
Daylight Savings Daylight saving is a period from late spring to early fall when many countries set
their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in
the evening.
Select this option if you use Daylight Saving Time.
Start Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you selected
Daylight Savings. The o'clock field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a
couple of examples:
Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the first
Sunday of April. Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight
Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So in the United States you would select
First, Sunday, April and type 2 in the o'clock field.
Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of March.
All of the time zones in the European Union start using Daylight Saving Time at
the same moment (1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would
select Last, Sunday, March. The time you type in the o'clock field depends on
your time zone. In Germany for instance, you would type 2 because Germany's
time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1).
Chapter 18 System
NBG334S User’s Guide
176
End Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you selected
Daylight Savings. The o'clock field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a
couple of examples:
Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the last Sunday of October.
Each time zone in the United States stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M.
local time. So in the United States you would select Last, Sunday, October
and type 2 in the o'clock field.
Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of
October. All of the time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving
Time at the same moment (1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you
would select Last, Sunday, October. The time you type in the o'clock field
depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you would type 2 because
Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1).
Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334S.
Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 70 Maintenance > System > Time Setting
LABEL DESCRIPTION
NBG334S User’s Guide
177
CHAPTER 19
Logs
This chapter contains information about configuring general log settings and viewing the
NBG334S’s logs. Refer to the appendices for example log message explanations.
19.1 View Log
The web configurator allows you to look at all of the NBG334S’s logs in one location.
Click Maintenance > Logs to open the View Log screen.
Use the View Log screen to see the logs for the categories that you selected in the Log
Settings screen (see Section 19.2 on page 178). Options include logs about system
maintenance, system errors, access control, allowed or blocked web sites, blocked web
features (such as ActiveX controls, Java and cookies), attacks (such as DoS) and IPSec.
Log entries in red indicate system error logs. The log wraps around and deletes the old entries
after it fills. Click a column heading to sort the entries. A triangle indicates ascending or
descending sort order.
Figure 104 Maintenance > Logs > View Log
Chapter 19 Logs
NBG334S User’s Guide
178
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
19.2 Log Settings
You can configure the NBG334S’s general log settings in one location.
Click Maintenance > Logs > Log Settings to open the Log Settings screen.
Use the Log Settings screen to configure to where the NBG334S is to send logs; the schedule
for when the NBG334S is to send the logs and which logs and/or immediate alerts the
NBG334S to send.
An alert is a type of log that warrants more serious attention. They include system errors,
attacks (access control) and attempted access to blocked web sites or web sites with restricted
web features such as cookies, active X and so on. Some categories such as System Errors
consist of both logs and alerts. You may differentiate them by their color in the View Log
screen. Alerts display in red and logs display in black.
Alerts are e-mailed as soon as they happen. Logs may be e-mailed as soon as the log is full
(see Log Schedule). Selecting many alert and/or log categories (especially Access Control)
may result in many e-mails being sent.
Table 71 Maintenance > Logs > View Log
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Display The categories that you select in the Log Settings page (see Section 19.2 on
page 178) display in the drop-down list box.
Select a category of logs to view; select All Logs to view logs from all of the log
categories that you selected in the Log Settings page.
Email Log Now Click Email Log Now to send the log screen to the e-mail address specified in
the Log Settings page (make sure that you have first filled in the Address Info
fields in Log Settings).
Refresh Click Refresh to renew the log screen.
Clear Log Click Clear Log to delete all the logs.
Time This field displays the time the log was recorded. See the chapter on system
maintenance and information to configure the NBG334S’s time and date.
Message This field states the reason for the log.
Source This field lists the source IP address and the port number of the incoming
packet.
Destination This field lists the destination IP address and the port number of the incoming
packet.
Note This field displays additional information about the log entry.
Chapter 19 Logs
NBG334S User’s Guide
179
Figure 105 Maintenance > Logs > Log Settings
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 72 Maintenance > Logs > Log Settings
LABEL DESCRIPTION
E-mail Log Settings
Mail Server Enter the server name or the IP address of the mail server for the e-mail
addresses specified below. If this field is left blank, logs and alert messages will
not be sent via E-mail.
Mail Subject Type a title that you want to be in the subject line of the log e-mail message that
the NBG334S sends. Not all NBG334S models have this field.
Send Log To The NBG334S sends logs to the e-mail address specified in this field. If this
field is left blank, the NBG334S does not send logs via e-mail.
Chapter 19 Logs
NBG334S User’s Guide
180
Send Alerts To Alerts are real-time notifications that are sent as soon as an event, such as a
DoS attack, system error, or forbidden web access attempt occurs. Enter the E-
mail address where the alert messages will be sent. Alerts include system
errors, attacks and attempted access to blocked web sites. If this field is left
blank, alert messages will not be sent via E-mail.
SMTP
Authentication
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) is the message-exchange standard for
the Internet. SMTP enables you to move messages from one e-mail server to
another.
Select the check box to activate SMTP authentication. If mail server
authentication is needed but this feature is disabled, you will not receive the e-
mail logs.
User Name Enter the user name (up to 31 characters) (usually the user name of a mail
account).
Password Enter the password associated with the user name above.
Log Schedule This drop-down menu is used to configure the frequency of log messages being
sent as E-mail:
•Daily
• Weekly
• Hourly
• When Log is Full
• None.
If you select Weekly or Daily, specify a time of day when the E-mail should be
sent. If you select Weekly, then also specify which day of the week the E-mail
should be sent. If you select When Log is Full, an alert is sent when the log fills
up. If you select None, no log messages are sent.
Day for Sending Log Use the drop down list box to select which day of the week to send the logs.
Time for Sending
Log
Enter the time of the day in 24-hour format (for example 23:00 equals 11:00 pm)
to send the logs.
Clear log after
sending mail
Select the checkbox to delete all the logs after the NBG334S sends an E-mail of
the logs.
Syslog Logging The NBG334S sends a log to an external syslog server.
Active Click Active to enable syslog logging.
Syslog Server IP
Address
Enter the server name or IP address of the syslog server that will log the
selected categories of logs.
Log Facility Select a location from the drop down list box. The log facility allows you to log
the messages to different files in the syslog server. Refer to the syslog server
manual for more information.
Active Log and Alert
Log Select the categories of logs that you want to record.
Send Immediate
Alert
Select log categories for which you want the NBG334S to send E-mail alerts
immediately.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Table 72 Maintenance > Logs > Log Settings
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Chapter 19 Logs
NBG334S User’s Guide
181
19.3 Log Descriptions
This section provides descriptions of example log messages.
Table 73 System Maintenance Logs
LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION
Time calibration is
successful
The router has adjusted its time based on information from
the time server.
Time calibration failed The router failed to get information from the time server.
WAN interface gets IP:%s A WAN interface got a new IP address from the DHCP,
PPPoE, PPTP or dial-up server.
DHCP client IP expired A DHCP client's IP address has expired.
DHCP server assigns%s The DHCP server assigned an IP address to a client.
Successful WEB login Someone has logged on to the router's web configurator
interface.
WEB login failed Someone has failed to log on to the router's web configurator
interface.
Successful TELNET login Someone has logged on to the router via telnet.
TELNET login failed Someone has failed to log on to the router via telnet.
Successful FTP login Someone has logged on to the router via ftp.
FTP login failed Someone has failed to log on to the router via ftp.
NAT Session Table is Full! The maximum number of NAT session table entries has been
exceeded and the table is full.
Starting Connectivity
Monitor
Starting Connectivity Monitor.
Time initialized by Daytime
Server
The router got the time and date from the Daytime server.
Time initialized by Time
server
The router got the time and date from the time server.
Time initialized by NTP
server
The router got the time and date from the NTP server.
Connect to Daytime server
fail
The router was not able to connect to the Daytime server.
Connect to Time server fail The router was not able to connect to the Time server.
Connect to NTP server fail The router was not able to connect to the NTP server.
Too large ICMP packet has
been dropped
The router dropped an ICMP packet that was too large.
Configuration Change: PC =
0x%x, Task ID = 0x%x
The router is saving configuration changes.
Successful SSH login Someone has logged on to the router’s SSH server.
SSH login failed Someone has failed to log on to the router’s SSH server.
Successful HTTPS login Someone has logged on to the router's web configurator
interface using HTTPS protocol.
HTTPS login failed Someone has failed to log on to the router's web configurator
interface using HTTPS protocol.
Chapter 19 Logs
NBG334S User’s Guide
182
Table 74 System Error Logs
LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION
%s exceeds the max.
number of session per
host!
This attempt to create a NAT session exceeds the maximum
number of NAT session table entries allowed to be created per
host.
setNetBIOSFilter: calloc
error
The router failed to allocate memory for the NetBIOS filter
settings.
readNetBIOSFilter: calloc
error
The router failed to allocate memory for the NetBIOS filter
settings.
WAN connection is down. A WAN connection is down. You cannot access the network
through this interface.
Table 75 Access Control Logs
LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION
Firewall default policy: [TCP |
UDP | IGMP | ESP | GRE | OSPF]
<Packet Direction>
Attempted TCP/UDP/IGMP/ESP/GRE/OSPF access
matched the default policy and was blocked or forwarded
according to the default policy’s setting.
Firewall rule [NOT] match:[TCP |
UDP | IGMP | ESP | GRE | OSPF]
<Packet Direction>, <rule:%d>
Attempted TCP/UDP/IGMP/ESP/GRE/OSPF access
matched (or did not match) a configured firewall rule
(denoted by its number) and was blocked or forwarded
according to the rule.
Triangle route packet forwarded:
[TCP | UDP | IGMP | ESP | GRE |
OSPF]
The firewall allowed a triangle route session to pass
through.
Packet without a NAT table entry
blocked: [TCP | UDP | IGMP | ESP
| GRE | OSPF]
The router blocked a packet that didn't have a
corresponding NAT table entry.
Router sent blocked web site
message: TCP
The router sent a message to notify a user that the router
blocked access to a web site that the user requested.
Table 76 TCP Reset Logs
LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION
Under SYN flood attack,
sent TCP RST
The router sent a TCP reset packet when a host was under a SYN
flood attack (the TCP incomplete count is per destination host.)
Exceed TCP MAX
incomplete, sent TCP RST
The router sent a TCP reset packet when the number of TCP
incomplete connections exceeded the user configured threshold.
(the TCP incomplete count is per destination host.) Note: Refer to
TCP Maximum Incomplete in the Firewall Attack Alerts screen.
Peer TCP state out of
order, sent TCP RST
The router sent a TCP reset packet when a TCP connection state
was out of order.Note: The firewall refers to RFC793 Figure 6 to
check the TCP state.
Chapter 19 Logs
NBG334S User’s Guide
183
Firewall session time
out, sent TCP RST
The router sent a TCP reset packet when a dynamic firewall
session timed out.
The default timeout values are as follows:
ICMP idle timeout: 3 minutes
UDP idle timeout: 3 minutes
TCP connection (three way handshaking) timeout: 270 seconds
TCP FIN-wait timeout: 2 MSL (Maximum Segment Lifetime set in
the TCP header).
TCP idle (established) timeout (s): 150 minutes
TCP reset timeout: 10 seconds
Exceed MAX incomplete,
sent TCP RST
The router sent a TCP reset packet when the number of
incomplete connections (TCP and UDP) exceeded the user-
configured threshold. (Incomplete count is for all TCP and UDP
connections through the firewall.)Note: When the number of
incomplete connections (TCP + UDP) > “Maximum Incomplete
High”, the router sends TCP RST packets for TCP connections
and destroys TOS (firewall dynamic sessions) until incomplete
connections < “Maximum Incomplete Low”.
Access block, sent TCP
RST
The router sends a TCP RST packet and generates this log if you
turn on the firewall TCP reset mechanism (via CI command: "sys
firewall tcprst").
Table 77 Packet Filter Logs
LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION
[TCP | UDP | ICMP | IGMP |
Generic] packet filter
matched (set:%d, rule:%d)
Attempted access matched a configured filter rule (denoted
by its set and rule number) and was blocked or forwarded
according to the rule.
Table 78 ICMP Logs
LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION
Firewall default policy: ICMP
<Packet Direction>, <type:%d>,
<code:%d>
ICMP access matched the default policy and was
blocked or forwarded according to the user's setting. For
type and code details, see Table 87 on page 188.
Firewall rule [NOT] match: ICMP
<Packet Direction>, <rule:%d>,
<type:%d>, <code:%d>
ICMP access matched (or didn’t match) a firewall rule
(denoted by its number) and was blocked or forwarded
according to the rule. For type and code details, see
Table 87 on page 188.
Triangle route packet forwarded:
ICMP
The firewall allowed a triangle route session to pass
through.
Packet without a NAT table entry
blocked: ICMP
The router blocked a packet that didn’t have a
corresponding NAT table entry.
Unsupported/out-of-order ICMP:
ICMP
The firewall does not support this kind of ICMP packets
or the ICMP packets are out of order.
Router reply ICMP packet: ICMP The router sent an ICMP reply packet to the sender.
Table 76 TCP Reset Logs (continued)
LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION
Chapter 19 Logs
NBG334S User’s Guide
184
Table 79 CDR Logs
LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION
board%d line%d channel%d,
call%d,%s C01 Outgoing Call
dev=%x ch=%x%s
The router received the setup requirements for a call. “call” is
the reference (count) number of the call. “dev” is the device
type (3 is for dial-up, 6 is for PPPoE, 10 is for PPTP).
"channel" or “ch” is the call channel ID.For example,"board 0
line 0 channel 0, call 3, C01 Outgoing Call dev=6 ch=0
"Means the router has dialed to the PPPoE server 3 times.
board%d line%d channel%d,
call%d,%s C02 OutCall
Connected%d%s
The PPPoE, PPTP or dial-up call is connected.
board%d line%d channel%d,
call%d,%s C02 Call
Terminated
The PPPoE, PPTP or dial-up call was disconnected.
Table 80 PPP Logs
LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION
ppp:LCP Starting The PPP connection’s Link Control Protocol stage has started.
ppp:LCP Opening The PPP connection’s Link Control Protocol stage is opening.
ppp:CHAP Opening The PPP connection’s Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol stage is
opening.
ppp:IPCP
Starting
The PPP connection’s Internet Protocol Control Protocol stage is starting.
ppp:IPCP Opening The PPP connection’s Internet Protocol Control Protocol stage is opening.
ppp:LCP Closing The PPP connection’s Link Control Protocol stage is closing.
ppp:IPCP Closing The PPP connection’s Internet Protocol Control Protocol stage is closing.
Table 81 UPnP Logs
LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION
UPnP pass through Firewall UPnP packets can pass through the firewall.
Table 82 Content Filtering Logs
LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION
%s: Keyword blocking The content of a requested web page matched a user defined
keyword.
%s: Not in trusted web
list
The web site is not in a trusted domain, and the router blocks all traffic
except trusted domain sites.
%s: Forbidden Web site The web site is in the forbidden web site list.
%s: Contains ActiveX The web site contains ActiveX.
%s: Contains Java
applet
The web site contains a Java applet.
%s: Contains cookie The web site contains a cookie.
Chapter 19 Logs
NBG334S User’s Guide
185
%s: Proxy mode
detected
The router detected proxy mode in the packet.
%s The content filter server responded that the web site is in the blocked
category list, but it did not return the category type.
%s:%s The content filter server responded that the web site is in the blocked
category list, and returned the category type.
%s(cache hit) The system detected that the web site is in the blocked list from the
local cache, but does not know the category type.
%s:%s(cache hit) The system detected that the web site is in blocked list from the local
cache, and knows the category type.
%s: Trusted Web site The web site is in a trusted domain.
%s When the content filter is not on according to the time schedule or you
didn't select the "Block Matched Web Site” check box, the system
forwards the web content.
Waiting content filter
server timeout
The external content filtering server did not respond within the timeout
period.
DNS resolving failed The NBG334S cannot get the IP address of the external content
filtering via DNS query.
Creating socket failed The NBG334S cannot issue a query because TCP/IP socket creation
failed, port:port number.
Connecting to content
filter server fail
The connection to the external content filtering server failed.
License key is invalid The external content filtering license key is invalid.
Table 83 Attack Logs
LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION
attack [TCP | UDP | IGMP
| ESP | GRE | OSPF]
The firewall detected a TCP/UDP/IGMP/ESP/GRE/OSPF attack.
attack ICMP (type:%d,
code:%d)
The firewall detected an ICMP attack. For type and code details,
see Table 87 on page 188.
land [TCP | UDP | IGMP |
ESP | GRE | OSPF]
The firewall detected a TCP/UDP/IGMP/ESP/GRE/OSPF land
attack.
land ICMP (type:%d,
code:%d)
The firewall detected an ICMP land attack. For type and code
details, see Table 87 on page 188.
ip spoofing - WAN [TCP |
UDP | IGMP | ESP | GRE |
OSPF]
The firewall detected an IP spoofing attack on the WAN port.
ip spoofing - WAN ICMP
(type:%d, code:%d)
The firewall detected an ICMP IP spoofing attack on the WAN
port. For type and code details, see Table 87 on page 188.
icmp echo: ICMP (type:%d,
code:%d)
The firewall detected an ICMP echo attack. For type and code
details, see Table 87 on page 188.
syn flood TCP The firewall detected a TCP syn flood attack.
ports scan TCP The firewall detected a TCP port scan attack.
teardrop TCP The firewall detected a TCP teardrop attack.
Table 82 Content Filtering Logs (continued)
LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION
Chapter 19 Logs
NBG334S User’s Guide
186
teardrop UDP The firewall detected an UDP teardrop attack.
teardrop ICMP (type:%d,
code:%d)
The firewall detected an ICMP teardrop attack. For type and code
details, see Table 87 on page 188.
illegal command TCP The firewall detected a TCP illegal command attack.
NetBIOS TCP The firewall detected a TCP NetBIOS attack.
ip spoofing - no routing
entry [TCP | UDP | IGMP |
ESP | GRE | OSPF]
The firewall classified a packet with no source routing entry as an
IP spoofing attack.
ip spoofing - no routing
entry ICMP (type:%d,
code:%d)
The firewall classified an ICMP packet with no source routing
entry as an IP spoofing attack.
vulnerability ICMP
(type:%d, code:%d)
The firewall detected an ICMP vulnerability attack. For type and
code details, see Table 87 on page 188.
traceroute ICMP (type:%d,
code:%d)
The firewall detected an ICMP traceroute attack. For type and
code details, see Table 87 on page 188.
Table 84 PKI Logs
LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION
Enrollment successful The SCEP online certificate enrollment was successful. The
Destination field records the certification authority server IP address
and port.
Enrollment failed The SCEP online certificate enrollment failed. The Destination field
records the certification authority server’s IP address and port.
Failed to resolve
<SCEP CA server url>
The SCEP online certificate enrollment failed because the certification
authority server’s address cannot be resolved.
Enrollment successful The CMP online certificate enrollment was successful. The Destination
field records the certification authority server’s IP address and port.
Enrollment failed The CMP online certificate enrollment failed. The Destination field
records the certification authority server’s IP address and port.
Failed to resolve <CMP
CA server url>
The CMP online certificate enrollment failed because the certification
authority server’s IP address cannot be resolved.
Rcvd ca cert: <subject
name>
The router received a certification authority certificate, with subject
name as recorded, from the LDAP server whose IP address and port
are recorded in the Source field.
Rcvd user cert:
<subject name>
The router received a user certificate, with subject name as recorded,
from the LDAP server whose IP address and port are recorded in the
Source field.
Rcvd CRL <size>:
<issuer name>
The router received a CRL (Certificate Revocation List), with size and
issuer name as recorded, from the LDAP server whose IP address and
port are recorded in the Source field.
Rcvd ARL <size>:
<issuer name>
The router received an ARL (Authority Revocation List), with size and
issuer name as recorded, from the LDAP server whose address and
port are recorded in the Source field.
Table 83 Attack Logs (continued)
LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION
Chapter 19 Logs
NBG334S User’s Guide
187
Failed to decode the
received ca cert
The router received a corrupted certification authority certificate from
the LDAP server whose address and port are recorded in the Source
field.
Failed to decode the
received user cert
The router received a corrupted user certificate from the LDAP server
whose address and port are recorded in the Source field.
Failed to decode the
received CRL
The router received a corrupted CRL (Certificate Revocation List) from
the LDAP server whose address and port are recorded in the Source
field.
Failed to decode the
received ARL
The router received a corrupted ARL (Authority Revocation List) from
the LDAP server whose address and port are recorded in the Source
field.
Rcvd data <size> too
large! Max size
allowed: <max size>
The router received directory data that was too large (the size is listed)
from the LDAP server whose address and port are recorded in the
Source field. The maximum size of directory data that the router allows
is also recorded.
Cert trusted: <subject
name>
The router has verified the path of the certificate with the listed subject
name.
Due to <reason codes>,
cert not trusted:
<subject name>
Due to the reasons listed, the certificate with the listed subject name
has not passed the path verification. The recorded reason codes are
only approximate reasons for not trusting the certificate. Please see
Table 87 on page 188 for the corresponding descriptions of the codes.
Table 85 802.1X Logs
LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION
Local User Database accepts
user.
A user was authenticated by the local user database.
Local User Database reports user
credential error.
A user was not authenticated by the local user database
because of an incorrect user password.
Local User Database does not
find user`s credential.
A user was not authenticated by the local user database
because the user is not listed in the local user database.
RADIUS accepts user. A user was authenticated by the RADIUS Server.
RADIUS rejects user. Pls check
RADIUS Server.
A user was not authenticated by the RADIUS Server.
Please check the RADIUS Server.
Local User Database does not
support authentication method.
The local user database only supports the EAP-MD5
method. A user tried to use another authentication
method and was not authenticated.
User logout because of session
timeout expired.
The router logged out a user whose session expired.
User logout because of user
deassociation.
The router logged out a user who ended the session.
User logout because of no
authentication response from
user.
The router logged out a user from which there was no
authentication response.
User logout because of idle
timeout expired.
The router logged out a user whose idle timeout period
expired.
User logout because of user
request.
A user logged out.
Table 84 PKI Logs (continued)
LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION
Chapter 19 Logs
NBG334S User’s Guide
188
Local User Database does not
support authentication method.
A user tried to use an authentication method that the
local user database does not support (it only supports
EAP-MD5).
No response from RADIUS. Pls
check RADIUS Server.
There is no response message from the RADIUS server,
please check the RADIUS server.
Use Local User Database to
authenticate user.
The local user database is operating as the
authentication server.
Use RADIUS to authenticate user. The RADIUS server is operating as the authentication
server.
No Server to authenticate user. There is no authentication server to authenticate a user.
Local User Database does not
find user`s credential.
A user was not authenticated by the local user database
because the user is not listed in the local user database.
Table 86 ACL Setting Notes
PACKET DIRECTION DIRECTION DESCRIPTION
(L to W) LAN to WAN ACL set for packets traveling from the LAN to the WAN.
(W to L) WAN to LAN ACL set for packets traveling from the WAN to the LAN.
(L to L/P) LAN to LAN/
NBG334S
ACL set for packets traveling from the LAN to the LAN or
the NBG334S.
(W to W/P) WAN to WAN/
NBG334S
ACL set for packets traveling from the WAN to the WAN
or the NBG334S.
Table 87 ICMP Notes
TYPE CODE DESCRIPTION
0 Echo Reply
0 Echo reply message
3 Destination Unreachable
0 Net unreachable
1 Host unreachable
2 Protocol unreachable
3 Port unreachable
4 A packet that needed fragmentation was dropped because it was set to Don't
Fragment (DF)
5 Source route failed
4 Source Quench
0 A gateway may discard internet datagrams if it does not have the buffer space
needed to queue the datagrams for output to the next network on the route to
the destination network.
5 Redirect
0 Redirect datagrams for the Network
1 Redirect datagrams for the Host
Table 85 802.1X Logs (continued)
LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION
Chapter 19 Logs
NBG334S User’s Guide
189
The following table shows RFC-2408 ISAKMP payload types that the log displays. Please
refer to the RFC for detailed information on each type.
2 Redirect datagrams for the Type of Service and Network
3 Redirect datagrams for the Type of Service and Host
8 Echo
0 Echo message
11 Time Exceeded
0 Time to live exceeded in transit
1 Fragment reassembly time exceeded
12 Parameter Problem
0 Pointer indicates the error
13 Timestamp
0 Timestamp request message
14 Timestamp Reply
0 Timestamp reply message
15 Information Request
0 Information request message
16 Information Reply
0 Information reply message
Table 88 Syslog Logs
LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION
<Facility*8 + Severity>Mon dd
hr:mm:ss hostname
src="<srcIP:srcPort>"
dst="<dstIP:dstPort>"
msg="<msg>" note="<note>"
devID="<mac address last three
numbers>" cat="<category>
"This message is sent by the system ("RAS" displays as
the system name if you haven’t configured one) when the
router generates a syslog. The facility is defined in the web
MAIN MENU->LOGS->Log Settings page. The severity is
the log’s syslog class. The definition of messages and
notes are defined in the various log charts throughout this
appendix. The “devID” is the last three characters of the
MAC address of the router’s LAN port. The “cat” is the
same as the category in the router’s logs.
Table 89 RFC-2408 ISAKMP Payload Types
LOG DISPLAY PAYLOAD TYPE
SA Security Association
PROP Proposal
TRANS Transform
KE Key Exchange
ID Identification
CER Certificate
CER_REQ Certificate Request
HASH Hash
Table 87 ICMP Notes (continued)
TYPE CODE DESCRIPTION
Chapter 19 Logs
NBG334S User’s Guide
190
SIG Signature
NONCE Nonce
NOTFY Notification
DEL Delete
VID Vendor ID
Table 89 RFC-2408 ISAKMP Payload Types (continued)
LOG DISPLAY PAYLOAD TYPE
NBG334S User’s Guide
191
CHAPTER 20
Tools
This chapter shows you how to upload a new firmware, upload or save backup configuration
files and restart the NBG334S.
20.1 Firmware Upload Screen
Find firmware at www.zyxel.com in a file that (usually) uses the system model name with a
“*.bin" extension, e.g., “NBG334S.bin". The upload process uses HTTP (Hypertext Transfer
Protocol) and may take up to two minutes. After a successful upload, the system will reboot.
See the Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance chapter for upgrading firmware using
FTP/TFTP commands.
Click Maintenance > Tools. Follow the instructions in this screen to upload firmware to your
NBG334S.
Figure 106 Maintenance > Tools > Firmware
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
" Do not turn off the NBG334S while firmware upload is in progress!
Table 90 Maintenance > Tools > Firmware
LABEL DESCRIPTION
File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse... to find
it.
Browse... Click Browse... to find the .bin file you want to upload. Remember that you must
decompress compressed (.zip) files before you can upload them.
Upload Click Upload to begin the upload process. This process may take up to two minutes.
Chapter 20 Tools
NBG334S User’s Guide
192
After you see the Firmware Upload In Process screen, wait two minutes before logging into
the NBG334S again.
Figure 107 Upload Warning
The NBG334S automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect. In
some operating systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop.
Figure 108 Network Temporarily Disconnected
After two minutes, log in again and check your new firmware version in the Status screen.
If the upload was not successful, the following screen will appear. Click Return to go back to
the Firmware screen.
Figure 109 Upload Error Message
20.2 Configuration Screen
See the Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance chapter for transferring configuration
files using FTP/TFTP commands.
Click Maintenance > Tools > Configuration. Information related to factory defaults, backup
configuration, and restoring configuration appears as shown next.
Chapter 20 Tools
NBG334S User’s Guide
193
Figure 110 Maintenance > Tools > Configuration
20.2.1 Backup Configuration
Backup configuration allows you to back up (save) the NBG334S’s current configuration to a
file on your computer. Once your NBG334S is configured and functioning properly, it is
highly recommended that you back up your configuration file before making configuration
changes. The backup configuration file will be useful in case you need to return to your
previous settings.
Click Backup to save the NBG334S’s current configuration to your computer.
20.2.2 Restore Configuration
Restore configuration allows you to upload a new or previously saved configuration file from
your computer to your NBG334S.
" Do not turn off the NBG334S while configuration file upload is in progress
After you see a “configuration upload successful” screen, you must then wait one minute
before logging into the NBG334S again.
Table 91 Maintenance Restore Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse... to find
it.
Browse... Click Browse... to find the file you want to upload. Remember that you must
decompress compressed (.ZIP) files before you can upload them.
Upload Click Upload to begin the upload process.
Chapter 20 Tools
NBG334S User’s Guide
194
Figure 111 Configuration Restore Successful
The NBG334S automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect. In
some operating systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop.
Figure 112 Temporarily Disconnected
If you uploaded the default configuration file you may need to change the IP address of your
computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default NBG334S IP address (192.168.1.1).
See your Quick Start Guide for details on how to set up your computer’s IP address.
If the upload was not successful, the following screen will appear. Click Return to go back to
the Configuration screen.
Figure 113 Configuration Restore Error
20.2.3 Back to Factory Defaults
Pressing the Reset button in this section clears all user-entered configuration information and
returns the NBG334S to its factory defaults.
You can also press the RESET button on the rear panel to reset the factory defaults of your
NBG334S. Refer to the chapter about introducing the web configurator for more information
on the RESET button.
20.3 Restart Screen
System restart allows you to reboot the NBG334S without turning the power off.
Chapter 20 Tools
NBG334S User’s Guide
195
Click Maintenance > Tools > Restart. Click Restart to have the NBG334S reboot. This does
not affect the NBG334S's configuration.
Figure 114 Maintenance > Tools > Restart
Chapter 20 Tools
NBG334S User’s Guide
196
NBG334S User’s Guide
197
CHAPTER 21
Configuration Mode
Click Maintenance > Config Mode to open the following screen. This screen allows you to
hide or display the advanced screens of some features or the advanced features, such as MAC
filter or static route. Basic is selected by default and you cannot see the advanced screens or
features. If you want to view and configure all screens including the advanced ones, select
Advanced and click Apply.
Figure 115 Maintenance > Config Mode > General
The following table describes the labels in the screen.
Table 92 Maintenance > Config Mode > General
The following table includes the screens that you can view and configure only when you select
Advanced.
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Configuration Mode
Basic Select Basic mode to enable or disable features and to monitor the status of your
device.
Advanced Select Advanced mode to set advanced settings.
Apply Click on this to set the mode.
Reset Click on this to reset your selection to the default (Advanced).
Chapter 21 Configuration Mode
NBG334S User’s Guide
198
Table 93 Advanced Configuration Options
" In AP Mode many screens will not be available. See Chapter 4 on page 61 for
more information.
CATEGORY LINK TAB
Network Wireless LAN MAC Filter
Advanced
QoS
WAN Advanced
LAN IP Alias
Advanced
DHCP Server Advanced
NAT Advanced
Security Firewall Services
Content Filter Schedule
Management Static Route IP Static Route
Bandwidth MGMT Advanced
Monitor
Remote MGMT Telnet
FTP
DNS
Maintenance Logs Log Settings
NBG334S User’s Guide
199
CHAPTER 22
Sys Op Mode
22.1 Overview
The Sys Op Mode (System Operation Mode) function lets you configure whether your
NBG334S is a router or AP. You can choose between Router Mode and AP Mode depending
on your network topology and the features you require from your device. See Section 1.1 on
page 29 for more information on which mode to choose.
22.1.1 Router
A router connects your local network with another network, such as the Internet. The router
has two IP addresses, the LAN IP address and the WAN IP address.
Figure 116 LAN and WAN IP Addresses in Router Mode
22.1.2 AP
An AP extends one network and so has just one IP address. All Ethernet ports on the AP have
the same IP address. To connect to the Internet, another device, such as a router, is required.
LAN IP
WAN IP
Internet
LAN
WAN
Chapter 22 Sys Op Mode
NBG334S User’s Guide
200
Figure 117 IP Address in AP Mode
22.2 Selecting System Operation Mode
Use this screen to select how you connect to the Internet.
Figure 118 Maintenance > Sys OP Mode > General
If you select Router Mode, the following pop-up message window appears.
Figure 119 Maintenance > Sys Op Mode > General: Router
• In this mode there are both LAN and WAN ports. The LAN Ethernet and WAN Ethernet
ports have different IP addresses.
• The DHCP server on your device is enabled and allocates IP addresses to other devices on
your local network.
• The LAN IP address of the device on the local network is set to 192.168.1.1.
• You can configure the IP address settings on your WAN port. Contact your ISP or system
administrator for more information on appropriate settings.
If you select Access Point the following pop-up message window appears.
1 IP
LAN
Internet
Chapter 22 Sys Op Mode
NBG334S User’s Guide
201
Figure 120 Maintenance > Sys Op Mode > General: AP
•In AP Mode all Ethernet ports have the same IP address.
• All ports on the rear panel of the device are LAN ports, including the port labeled WAN.
There is no WAN port.
• The DHCP server on your device is disabled. In AP mode there must be a device with a
DHCP server on your network such as a router or gateway which can allocate IP
addresses.
The IP address of the device on the local network is set to 192.168.1.1.
The following table describes the labels in the General screen.
Table 94 Maintenance > Sys OP Mode > General
" If you select the incorrect System Operation Mode you cannot connect to the
Internet.
LABEL DESCRIPTION
System Operation Mode
Router Select Router if your device routes traffic between a local network and another
network such as the Internet. This mode offers services such as a firewall or
bandwidth management.
Access Point Select Access Point if your device bridges traffic between clients on the same
network.
Apply Click Apply to save your settings.
Reset Click Reset to return your settings to the default (Router)
Chapter 22 Sys Op Mode
NBG334S User’s Guide
202
NBG334S User’s Guide
203
CHAPTER 23
Troubleshooting
This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter. The potential
problems are divided into the following categories.
• Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs
• NBG334S Access and Login
• Internet Access
• Resetting the NBG334S to Its Factory Defaults
• Wireless Router/AP Troubleshooting
• Advanced Features
23.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs
V The NBG334S does not turn on. None of the LEDs turn on.
7 Make sure you are using the power adaptor or cord included with the NBG334S.
8 Make sure the power adaptor or cord is connected to the NBG334S and plugged in to an
appropriate power source. Make sure the power source is turned on.
9 Disconnect and re-connect the power adaptor or cord to the NBG334S.
10 If the problem continues, contact the vendor.
V One of the LEDs does not behave as expected.
1 Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED. See Section 1.7 on page 31.
2 Check the hardware connections. See the Quick Start Guide.
3 Inspect your cables for damage. Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables.
4 Disconnect and re-connect the power adaptor to the NBG334S.
5 If the problem continues, contact the vendor.
Chapter 23 Troubleshooting
NBG334S User’s Guide
204
23.2 NBG334S Access and Login
V I don’t know the IP address of my NBG334S.
1 The default IP address is 192.168.1.1.
2 If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, you might get the IP address of the
NBG334S by looking up the IP address of the default gateway for your computer. To do
this in most Windows computers, click Start > Run, enter cmd, and then enter ipconfig.
The IP address of the Default Gateway might be the IP address of the NBG334S (it
depends on the network), so enter this IP address in your Internet browser.
3 Set your device to Router Mode, login (see the Quick Start Guide for instructions) and
go to the Device Information table in the Status screen. Your NBG334S’s IP address is
available in the Device Information table.
• If the DHCP setting under LAN information is None, your device has a fixed IP
address.
• If the DHCP setting under LAN information is Client, then your device receives an
IP address from a DHCP server on the network.
4 If your NBG334S is a DHCP client, you can find your IP address from the DHCP server.
This information is only available from the DHCP server which allocates IP addresses
on your network. Find this information directly from the DHCP server or contact your
system administrator for more information.
5 Reset your NBG334S to change all settings back to their default. This means your
current settings are lost. See Section 23.4 on page 207 in the Troubleshooting for
information on resetting your NBG334S.
V I forgot the password.
1 The default password is 1234.
2 If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section
23.4 on page 207.
V I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator.
1 Make sure you are using the correct IP address.
• The default IP address is 192.168.1.1.
• If you changed the IP address (Section 7.3 on page 102), use the new IP address.
• If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, see the troubleshooting
suggestions for I don’t know the IP address of my NBG334S.
Chapter 23 Troubleshooting
NBG334S User’s Guide
205
2 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See
the Quick Start Guide.
3 Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop-up windows and has JavaScripts
and Java enabled. See Appendix B on page 217.
4 Make sure your computer is in the same subnet as the NBG334S. (If you know that there
are routers between your computer and the NBG334S, skip this step.)
• If there is a DHCP server on your network, make sure your computer is using a
dynamic IP address. See Section 7.3 on page 102.
• If there is no DHCP server on your network, make sure your computer’s IP address is
in the same subnet as the NBG334S. See Section 7.3 on page 102.
5 Reset the device to its factory defaults, and try to access the NBG334S with the default
IP address. See Section 7.3 on page 102.
6 If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor, or try one of the
advanced suggestions.
Advanced Suggestions
• Try to access the NBG334S using another service, such as Telnet. If you can access the
NBG334S, check the remote management settings and firewall rules to find out why the
NBG334S does not respond to HTTP.
• If your computer is connected to the WA N port or is connected wirelessly, use a computer
that is connected to a LAN/ETHERNET port.
V I can see the Login screen, but I cannot log in to the NBG334S.
1 Make sure you have entered the password correctly. The default password is 1234. This
field is case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on.
2 You cannot log in to the web configurator while someone is using Telnet to access the
NBG334S. Log out of the NBG334S in the other session, or ask the person who is
logged in to log out.
3 Disconnect and re-connect the power adaptor or cord to the NBG334S.
4 If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section
23.4 on page 207.
V I cannot Telnet to the NBG334S.
See the troubleshooting suggestions for I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web
configurator. Ignore the suggestions about your browser.
V I cannot use FTP to upload / download the configuration file. / I cannot use
FTP to upload new firmware.
Chapter 23 Troubleshooting
NBG334S User’s Guide
206
See the troubleshooting suggestions for I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web
configurator. Ignore the suggestions about your browser.
23.3 Internet Access
V I cannot access the Internet.
1 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See
the Quick Start Guide.
2 Make sure you entered your ISP account information correctly in the wizard. These
fields are case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on.
3 If you are trying to access the Internet wirelessly, make sure the wireless settings in the
wireless client are the same as the settings in the AP.
4 Disconnect all the cables from your device, and follow the directions in the Quick Start
Guide again.
5 Go to Maintenance > Sys OP Mode > General. Check your System Operation Mode
setting.
• Select Router if your device routes traffic between a local network and another
network such as the Internet.
• Select Access Point if your device bridges traffic between clients on the same
network.
6 If the problem continues, contact your ISP.
V I cannot access the Internet anymore. I had access to the Internet (with the
NBG334S), but my Internet connection is not available anymore.
1 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See
the Quick Start Guide and Section 1.7 on page 31.
2 Reboot the NBG334S.
3 If the problem continues, contact your ISP.
V The Internet connection is slow or intermittent.
1 There might be a lot of traffic on the network. Look at the LEDs, and check Section 1.7
on page 31. If the NBG334S is sending or receiving a lot of information, try closing
some programs that use the Internet, especially peer-to-peer applications.
2 Check the signal strength. If the signal strength is low, try moving the NBG334S closer
to the AP if possible, and look around to see if there are any devices that might be
Chapter 23 Troubleshooting
NBG334S User’s Guide
207
interfering with the wireless network (for example, microwaves, other wireless
networks, and so on).
3 Reboot the NBG334S.
4 If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor, or try one of the
advanced suggestions.
Advanced Suggestions
• Check the settings for bandwidth management. If it is disabled, you might consider
activating it. If it is enabled, you might consider changing the allocations.
• Check the settings for QoS. If it is disabled, you might consider activating it. If it is
enabled, you might consider raising or lowering the priority for some applications.
23.4 Resetting the NBG334S to Its Factory Defaults
If you reset the NBG334S, you lose all of the changes you have made. The NBG334S re-loads
its default settings, and the password resets to 1234. You have to make all of your changes
again.
V You will lose all of your changes when you push the RESET button.
To reset the NBG334S,
1 Make sure the power LED is on and not blinking.
2
Press and hold the RESET button for five to ten seconds. Release the RESET button
when the power LED begins to blink. The default settings have been restored.
If the NBG334S restarts automatically, wait for the NBG334S to finish restarting, and log in to
the web configurator. The password is “1234”.
If the NBG334S does not restart automatically,
disconnect and reconnect the NBG334S’s
power. Then, follow the directions above again.
23.5 Wireless Router/AP Troubleshooting
V I cannot access the NBG334S or ping any computer from the WLAN (wireless
AP or router).
1 Make sure the wireless LAN is enabled on the NBG334S
2 Make sure the wireless adapter on the wireless station is working properly.
3 Make sure the wireless adapter installed on your computer is IEEE 802.11 compatible
and supports the same wireless standard as the NBG334S.
Chapter 23 Troubleshooting
NBG334S User’s Guide
208
4 Make sure your computer (with a wireless adapter installed) is within the transmission
range of the NBG334S.
5 Check that both the NBG334S and your wireless station are using the same wireless and
wireless security settings.
6 Make sure traffic between the WLAN and the LAN is not blocked by the firewall on the
NBG334S.
7 Make sure you allow the NBG334S to be remotely accessed through the WLAN
interface. Check your remote management settings.
• See the chapter on Wireless LAN in the User’s Guide for more information.
23.6 Advanced Features
V I can log in, but I cannot see some of the screens or fields in the Web
Configurator.
You may be accessing the Web Configurator in Basic mode. Some screens and fields are
available only in Advanced mode. Use the Maintenance > Config Mode screen to select
Advanced mode.
You may be accessing the Web Configurator in AP Mode. Some screens and fields are
available only in Router Mode. Use the Maintenance > Sys OP Mode screen to select Router
Mode.
V I set up URL keyword blocking, but I can still access a website that should be
blocked.
Make sure that you select the Enable URL Keyword Blocking check box in the Content
Filtering screen. Make sure that the keywords that you type are listed in the Keyword List.
If a keyword that is listed in the Keyword List is not blocked when it is found in a URL,
customize the keyword blocking using commands. See the Customizing Keyword Blocking
URL Checking section in the Content Filter chapter.
209
PART VI
Appendices and
Index
Product Specifications and Wall-Mounting Instructions (211)
Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions (217)
IP Addresses and Subnetting (223)
Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address (231)
Wireless LANs (247)
Services (259)
Legal Information (263)
Customer Support (267)
Index (273)
210
NBG334S User’s Guide
211
APPENDIX A
Product Specifications and Wall-
Mounting Instructions
The following tables summarize the NBG334S’s hardware and firmware features.
Table 95 Hardware Features
Dimensions (W x D x H) 162 x 115 x 33 mm
Weight 237g
Power Specification Input: 120~240 AC, 50~60 Hz
Output: 12 V AC 1 A
Ethernet ports Auto-negotiating: 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps in either half-duplex or full-duplex
mode.
Auto-crossover: Use either crossover or straight-through Ethernet cables.
4-5 Port Switch A combination of switch and router makes your NBG334S a cost-effective
and viable network solution. You can add up to four computers to the
NBG334S without the cost of a hub when connecting to the Internet through
the WAN port. You can add up to five computers to the NBG334S when you
connect to the Internet in AP mode. Add more than four computers to your
LAN by using a hub.
LEDs PWR, LAN1-4, WAN, WLAN, WPS
Reset Button The reset button is built into the rear panel. Use this button to restore the
NBG334S to its factory default settings. Press for 1 second to restart the
device. Press for 5 seconds to restore to factory default settings.
Antenna The NBG334S is equipped with a 2dBi detachable antenna to provide clear
radio transmission and reception on the wireless network.
Operation Environment Temperature: 0º C ~ 40º C
Humidity: 20% ~ 85% RH (Non-condensing)
Storage Environment Temperature: -30º C ~ 60º C
Humidity: 20% ~ 90% RH (Non-condensing)
Distance between the
centers of the holes on
the device’s back.
125 mm
Screw size for wall-
mounting
M3*10
Table 96 Firmware Features
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Default IP Address 192.168.1.1
Default Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 (24 bits)
Appendix A Product Specifications and Wall-Mounting Instructions
NBG334S User’s Guide
212
Default Password 1234
DHCP Pool 192.168.1.33 to 192.168.1.64
Device Management Use the web configurator to easily configure the rich range of features on
the NBG334S.
Wireless Functionality Allows IEEE 802.11b and/or IEEE 802.11g wireless clients to connect to
the NBG334S wirelessly. IEEE 802.11g clients can connect using the
Super G function. Enable wireless security (WEP, WPA(2), WPA(2)-
PSK) and/or MAC filtering to protect your wireless network.
Note: The NBG334S may be prone to RF (Radio
Frequency) interference from other 2.4 GHz devices
such as microwave ovens, wireless phones,
Bluetooth enabled devices, and other wireless LANs.
Firmware Upgrade Download new firmware (when available) from the ZyXEL web site and
use the web configurator, an FTP or a TFTP tool to put it on the
NBG334S.
Note: Only upload firmware for your specific model!
Configuration Backup &
Restoration
Make a copy of the NBG334S’s configuration and put it back on the
NBG334S later if you decide you want to revert back to an earlier
configuration.
Network Address
Translation (NAT)
Each computer on your network must have its own unique IP address.
Use NAT to convert a single public IP address to multiple private IP
addresses for the computers on your network.
Firewall You can configure firewall on the NBG334S for secure Internet access.
When the firewall is on, by default, all incoming traffic from the Internet to
your network is blocked unless it is initiated from your network. This
means that probes from the outside to your network are not allowed, but
you can safely browse the Internet and download files for example.
Content Filter The NBG334S blocks or allows access to web sites that you specify and
blocks access to web sites with URLs that contain keywords that you
specify. You can define time periods and days during which content
filtering is enabled. You can also include or exclude particular computers
on your network from content filtering.
You can also subscribe to category-based content filtering that allows
your NBG334S to check web sites against an external database.
Bandwidth Management You can efficiently manage traffic on your network by reserving
bandwidth and giving priority to certain types of traffic and/or to particular
computers.
Time and Date Get the current time and date from an external server when you turn on
your NBG334S. You can also set the time manually. These dates and
times are then used in logs.
Port Forwarding If you have a server (mail or web server for example) on your network,
then use this feature to let people access it from the Internet.
DHCP (Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol)
Use this feature to have the NBG334S assign IP addresses, an IP
default gateway and DNS servers to computers on your network.
Dynamic DNS Support With Dynamic DNS (Domain Name System) support, you can use a
fixed URL, www.zyxel.com for example, with a dynamic IP address. You
must register for this service with a Dynamic DNS service provider.
Table 96 Firmware Features
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Appendix A Product Specifications and Wall-Mounting Instructions
NBG334S User’s Guide
213
The following list, which is not exhaustive, illustrates the standards supported in the
NBG334S.
IP Multicast IP Multicast is used to send traffic to a specific group of computers. The
NBG334S supports versions 1 and 2 of IGMP (Internet Group
Management Protocol) used to join multicast groups (see RFC 2236).
IP Alias IP Alias allows you to subdivide a physical network into logical networks
over the same Ethernet interface with the NBG334S itself as the
gateway for each subnet.
Logging and Tracing Use packet tracing and logs for troubleshooting. You can send logs from
the NBG334S to an external UNIX syslog server.
PPPoE PPPoE mimics a dial-up over Ethernet Internet access connection.
PPTP Encapsulation Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP) enables secure transfer of
data through a Virtual Private Network (VPN). The NBG334S supports
one PPTP connection at a time.
Universal Plug and Play
(UPnP)
The NBG334S can communicate with other UPnP enabled devices in a
network.
Table 97 Feature Specifications
FEATURE SPECIFICATION
Number of Static Routes 7
Number of Port Forwarding Rules 12
Number of NAT Sessions 2048
Number of Address Mapping Rules 10
Number of Bandwidth Management
Classes
3
Number of DNS Name Server Record
Entries
3
Table 98 Standards Supported
STANDARD DESCRIPTION
RFC 867 Daytime Protocol
RFC 868 Time Protocol.
RFC 1058 RIP-1 (Routing Information Protocol)
RFC 1112 IGMP v1
RFC 1305 Network Time Protocol (NTP version 3)
RFC 1631 IP Network Address Translator (NAT)
RFC 1723 RIP-2 (Routing Information Protocol)
RFC 2236 Internet Group Management Protocol, Version 2.
RFC 2516 A Method for Transmitting PPP Over Ethernet (PPPoE)
RFC 2766 Network Address Translation - Protocol
IEEE 802.11 Also known by the brand Wi-Fi, denotes a set of Wireless LAN/WLAN
standards developed by working group 11 of the IEEE LAN/MAN
Standards Committee (IEEE 802).
Table 96 Firmware Features
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Appendix A Product Specifications and Wall-Mounting Instructions
NBG334S User’s Guide
214
Wall-mounting Instructions
Do the following to hang your NBG334S on a wall.
" See the Figure 122 on page 215 for the size of screws to use and how far
apart to place them.
1 Locate a high position on a wall that is free of obstructions. Use a sturdy wall.
2 Drill two holes for the screws. Make sure the distance between the centers of the holes
matches what is listed in the product specifications appendix.
1 Be careful to avoid damaging pipes or cables located inside the wall when
drilling holes for the screws.
3 Do not screw the screws all the way into the wall. Leave a small gap of about 0.5 cm
between the heads of the screws and the wall.
4 Make sure the screws are snugly fastened to the wall. They need to hold the weight of
the NBG334S with the connection cables.
5 Align the holes on the back of the NBG334S with the screws on the wall. Hang the
NBG334S on the screws.
IEEE 802.11b Uses the 2.4 gigahertz (GHz) band
IEEE 802.11g Uses the 2.4 gigahertz (GHz) band
IEEE 802.11d Standard for Local and Metropolitan Area Networks: Media Access
Control (MAC) Bridges
IEEE 802.11x Port Based Network Access Control.
IEEE 802.11e QoS IEEE 802.11 e Wireless LAN for Quality of Service
Microsoft PPTP MS PPTP (Microsoft's implementation of Point to Point Tunneling
Protocol)
MBM v2 Media Bandwidth Management v2
Table 98 Standards Supported (continued)
STANDARD DESCRIPTION
Appendix A Product Specifications and Wall-Mounting Instructions
NBG334S User’s Guide
215
Figure 121 Wall-mounting Example
The following are dimensions of an M4 tap screw and masonry plug used for wall mounting.
All measurements are in millimeters (mm).
Figure 122 Masonry Plug and M4 Tap Screw
Appendix A Product Specifications and Wall-Mounting Instructions
NBG334S User’s Guide
216
NBG334S User’s Guide
217
APPENDIX B
Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts
and Java Permissions
In order to use the web configurator you need to allow:
• Web browser pop-up windows from your device.
• JavaScripts (enabled by default).
• Java permissions (enabled by default).
" Internet Explorer 6 screens are used here. Screens for other Internet Explorer
versions may vary.
Internet Explorer Pop-up Blockers
You may have to disable pop-up blocking to log into your device.
Either disable pop-up blocking (enabled by default in Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2) or
allow pop-up blocking and create an exception for your device’s IP address.
Disable pop-up Blockers
1 In Internet Explorer, select To o l s , Pop-up Blocker and then select Turn Off Pop-up
Blocker.
Figure 123 Pop-up Blocker
You can also check if pop-up blocking is disabled in the Pop-up Blocker section in the
Privacy tab.
1 In Internet Explorer, select To o l s , Internet Options, Privacy.
Appendix B Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
NBG334S User’s Guide
218
2 Clear the Block pop-ups check box in the Pop-up Blocker section of the screen. This
disables any web pop-up blockers you may have enabled.
Figure 124 Internet Options: Privacy
3 Click Apply to save this setting.
Enable pop-up Blockers with Exceptions
Alternatively, if you only want to allow pop-up windows from your device, see the following
steps.
1 In Internet Explorer, select To o l s , Internet Options and then the Privacy tab.
2 Select Settings…to open the Pop-up Blocker Settings screen.
Appendix B Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
NBG334S User’s Guide
219
Figure 125 Internet Options: Privacy
3 Type the IP address of your device (the web page that you do not want to have blocked)
with the prefix “http://”. For example, http://192.168.167.1.
4 Click Add to move the IP address to the list of Allowed sites.
Figure 126 Pop-up Blocker Settings
Appendix B Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
NBG334S User’s Guide
220
5 Click Close to return to the Privacy screen.
6 Click Apply to save this setting.
JavaScripts
If pages of the web configurator do not display properly in Internet Explorer, check that
JavaScripts are allowed.
1 In Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Security tab.
Figure 127 Internet Options: Security
2 Click the Custom Level... button.
3 Scroll down to Scripting.
4 Under Active scripting make sure that Enable is selected (the default).
5 Under Scripting of Java applets make sure that Enable is selected (the default).
6 Click OK to close the window.
Appendix B Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
NBG334S User’s Guide
221
Figure 128 Security Settings - Java Scripting
Java Permissions
1 From Internet Explorer, click Too ls, Internet Options and then the Security tab.
2 Click the Custom Level... button.
3 Scroll down to Microsoft VM.
4 Under Java permissions make sure that a safety level is selected.
5 Click OK to close the window.
Figure 129 Security Settings - Java
Appendix B Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
NBG334S User’s Guide
222
JAVA (Sun)
1 From Internet Explorer, click Too ls, Internet Options and then the Advanced tab.
2 Make sure that Use Java 2 for <applet> under Java (Sun) is selected.
3 Click OK to close the window.
Figure 130 Java (Sun)
NBG334S User’s Guide
223
APPENDIX C
IP Addresses and Subnetting
This appendix introduces IP addresses and subnet masks.
IP addresses identify individual devices on a network. Every networking device (including
computers, servers, routers, printers, etc.) needs an IP address to communicate across the
network. These networking devices are also known as hosts.
Subnet masks determine the maximum number of possible hosts on a network. You can also
use subnet masks to divide one network into multiple sub-networks.
Introduction to IP Addresses
One part of the IP address is the network number, and the other part is the host ID. In the same
way that houses on a street share a common street name, the hosts on a network share a
common network number. Similarly, as each house has its own house number, each host on
the network has its own unique identifying number - the host ID. Routers use the network
number to send packets to the correct network, while the host ID determines to which host on
the network the packets are delivered.
Structure
An IP address is made up of four parts, written in dotted decimal notation (for example,
192.168.1.1). Each of these four parts is known as an octet. An octet is an eight-digit binary
number (for example 11000000, which is 192 in decimal notation).
Therefore, each octet has a possible range of 00000000 to 11111111 in binary, or 0 to 255 in
decimal.
The following figure shows an example IP address in which the first three octets (192.168.1)
are the network number, and the fourth octet (16) is the host ID.
Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting
NBG334S User’s Guide
224
Figure 131 Network Number and Host ID
How much of the IP address is the network number and how much is the host ID varies
according to the subnet mask.
Subnet Masks
A subnet mask is used to determine which bits are part of the network number, and which bits
are part of the host ID (using a logical AND operation). The term “subnet” is short for “sub-
network”.
A subnet mask has 32 bits. If a bit in the subnet mask is a “1” then the corresponding bit in the
IP address is part of the network number. If a bit in the subnet mask is “0” then the
corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the host ID.
The following example shows a subnet mask identifying the network number (in bold text)
and host ID of an IP address (192.168.1.2 in decimal).
By convention, subnet masks always consist of a continuous sequence of ones beginning from
the leftmost bit of the mask, followed by a continuous sequence of zeros, for a total number of
32 bits.
Subnet masks can be referred to by the size of the network number part (the bits with a “1”
value). For example, an “8-bit mask” means that the first 8 bits of the mask are ones and the
remaining 24 bits are zeroes.
Table 99 Subnet Mask - Identifying Network Number
1ST
OCTET:
(192)
2ND
OCTET:
(168)
3RD
OCTET:
(1)
4TH OCTET
(2)
IP Address (Binary) 11000000 10101000 00000001 00000010
Subnet Mask (Binary) 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000
Network Number 11000000 10101000 00000001
Host ID 00000010
Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting
NBG334S User’s Guide
225
Subnet masks are expressed in dotted decimal notation just like IP addresses. The following
examples show the binary and decimal notation for 8-bit, 16-bit, 24-bit and 29-bit subnet
masks.
Network Size
The size of the network number determines the maximum number of possible hosts you can
have on your network. The larger the number of network number bits, the smaller the number
of remaining host ID bits.
An IP address with host IDs of all zeros is the IP address of the network (192.168.1.0 with a
24-bit subnet mask, for example). An IP address with host IDs of all ones is the broadcast
address for that network (192.168.1.255 with a 24-bit subnet mask, for example).
As these two IP addresses cannot be used for individual hosts, calculate the maximum number
of possible hosts in a network as follows:
Notation
Since the mask is always a continuous number of ones beginning from the left, followed by a
continuous number of zeros for the remainder of the 32 bit mask, you can simply specify the
number of ones instead of writing the value of each octet. This is usually specified by writing
a “/” followed by the number of bits in the mask after the address.
For example, 192.1.1.0 /25 is equivalent to saying 192.1.1.0 with subnet mask
255.255.255.128.
The following table shows some possible subnet masks using both notations.
Table 100 Subnet Masks
BINARY
DECIMAL
1ST
OCTET
2ND
OCTET
3RD
OCTET
4TH OCTET
8-bit mask 11111111 00000000 00000000 00000000 255.0.0.0
16-bit mask 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 255.255.0.0
24-bit mask 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000 255.255.255.0
29-bit mask 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111000 255.255.255.248
Table 101 Maximum Host Numbers
SUBNET MASK HOST ID SIZE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF HOSTS
8 bits 255.0.0.0 24 bits 2
24
– 2 16777214
16 bits 255.255.0.0 16 bits 2
16
– 2 65534
24 bits 255.255.255.0 8 bits 2
8
– 2 254
29 bits 255.255.255.248 3 bits 2
3
– 2 6
Table 102 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation
SUBNET MASK
ALTERNATIVE
NOTATION
LAST OCTET
(BINARY)
LAST OCTET
(DECIMAL)
255.255.255.0 /24 0000 0000 0
255.255.255.128 /25 1000 0000 128
Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting
NBG334S User’s Guide
226
Subnetting
You can use subnetting to divide one network into multiple sub-networks. In the following
example a network administrator creates two sub-networks to isolate a group of servers from
the rest of the company network for security reasons.
In this example, the company network address is 192.168.1.0. The first three octets of the
address (192.168.1) are the network number, and the remaining octet is the host ID, allowing a
maximum of 2
8
– 2 or 254 possible hosts.
The following figure shows the company network before subnetting.
Figure 132 Subnetting Example: Before Subnetting
You can “borrow” one of the host ID bits to divide the network 192.168.1.0 into two separate
sub-networks. The subnet mask is now 25 bits (255.255.255.128 or /25).
The “borrowed” host ID bit can have a value of either 0 or 1, allowing two subnets;
192.168.1.0 /25 and 192.168.1.128 /25.
The following figure shows the company network after subnetting. There are now two sub-
networks, A and B.
255.255.255.192 /26 1100 0000 192
255.255.255.224 /27 1110 0000 224
255.255.255.240 /28 1111 0000 240
255.255.255.248 /29 1111 1000 248
255.255.255.252 /30 1111 1100 252
Table 102 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation (continued)
SUBNET MASK
ALTERNATIVE
NOTATION
LAST OCTET
(BINARY)
LAST OCTET
(DECIMAL)
Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting
NBG334S User’s Guide
227
Figure 133 Subnetting Example: After Subnetting
In a 25-bit subnet the host ID has 7 bits, so each sub-network has a maximum of 2
7
– 2 or 126
possible hosts (a host ID of all zeroes is the subnet’s address itself, all ones is the subnet’s
broadcast address).
192.168.1.0 with mask 255.255.255.128 is subnet A itself, and 192.168.1.127 with mask
255.255.255.128 is its broadcast address. Therefore, the lowest IP address that can be assigned
to an actual host for subnet A is 192.168.1.1 and the highest is 192.168.1.126.
Similarly, the host ID range for subnet B is 192.168.1.129 to 192.168.1.254.
Example: Four Subnets
The previous example illustrated using a 25-bit subnet mask to divide a 24-bit address into two
subnets. Similarly, to divide a 24-bit address into four subnets, you need to “borrow” two host
ID bits to give four possible combinations (00, 01, 10 and 11). The subnet mask is 26 bits
(11111111.11111111.11111111.11000000) or 255.255.255.192.
Each subnet contains 6 host ID bits, giving 2
6
- 2 or 62 hosts for each subnet (a host ID of all
zeroes is the subnet itself, all ones is the subnet’s broadcast address).
Table 103 Subnet 1
IP/SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER
LAST OCTET BIT
VALUE
IP Address (Decimal) 192.168.1. 0
IP Address (Binary) 11000000.10101000.00000001. 00000000
Subnet Mask (Binary) 11111111.11111111.11111111. 11000000
Subnet Address:
192.168.1.0
Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.1
Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.63
Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.62
Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting
NBG334S User’s Guide
228
Example: Eight Subnets
Similarly, use a 27-bit mask to create eight subnets (000, 001, 010, 011, 100, 101, 110 and
111).
The following table shows IP address last octet values for each subnet.
Table 104 Subnet 2
IP/SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER
LAST OCTET BIT
VALUE
IP Address 192.168.1. 64
IP Address (Binary) 11000000.10101000.00000001. 01000000
Subnet Mask (Binary) 11111111.11111111.11111111. 11000000
Subnet Address:
192.168.1.64
Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.65
Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.127
Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.126
Table 105 Subnet 3
IP/SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER
LAST OCTET BIT
VALUE
IP Address 192.168.1. 128
IP Address (Binary) 11000000.10101000.00000001. 10000000
Subnet Mask (Binary) 11111111.11111111.11111111. 11000000
Subnet Address:
192.168.1.128
Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.129
Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.191
Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.190
Table 106 Subnet 4
IP/SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER
LAST OCTET BIT
VALUE
IP Address 192.168.1. 192
IP Address (Binary) 11000000.10101000.00000001. 11000000
Subnet Mask (Binary) 11111111.11111111.11111111. 11000000
Subnet Address:
192.168.1.192
Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.193
Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.255
Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.254
Table 107 Eight Subnets
SUBNET
SUBNET
ADDRESS
FIRST ADDRESS
LAST
ADDRESS
BROADCAST
ADDRESS
1 0 1 30 31
2 32 33 62 63
3 64 65 94 95
4 96 97 126 127
Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting
NBG334S User’s Guide
229
Subnet Planning
The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 24-bit network
number.
The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 16-bit network
number.
5 128 129 158 159
6 160 161 190 191
7 192 193 222 223
8 224 225 254 255
Table 107 Eight Subnets (continued)
SUBNET
SUBNET
ADDRESS
FIRST ADDRESS
LAST
ADDRESS
BROADCAST
ADDRESS
Table 108 24-bit Network Number Subnet Planning
NO. “BORROWED”
HOST BITS
SUBNET MASK NO. SUBNETS
NO. HOSTS PER
SUBNET
1 255.255.255.128 (/25) 2 126
2 255.255.255.192 (/26) 4 62
3 255.255.255.224 (/27) 8 30
4 255.255.255.240 (/28) 16 14
5 255.255.255.248 (/29) 32 6
6 255.255.255.252 (/30) 64 2
7 255.255.255.254 (/31) 128 1
Table 109 16-bit Network Number Subnet Planning
NO. “BORROWED”
HOST BITS
SUBNET MASK NO. SUBNETS
NO. HOSTS PER
SUBNET
1 255.255.128.0 (/17) 2 32766
2 255.255.192.0 (/18) 4 16382
3 255.255.224.0 (/19) 8 8190
4 255.255.240.0 (/20) 16 4094
5 255.255.248.0 (/21) 32 2046
6 255.255.252.0 (/22) 64 1022
7 255.255.254.0 (/23) 128 510
8 255.255.255.0 (/24) 256 254
9 255.255.255.128 (/25) 512 126
10 255.255.255.192 (/26) 1024 62
11 255.255.255.224 (/27) 2048 30
12 255.255.255.240 (/28) 4096 14
13 255.255.255.248 (/29) 8192 6
Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting
NBG334S User’s Guide
230
Configuring IP Addresses
Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation. If the ISP or
your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses, follow their
instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask.
If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number, then most likely you have a single
user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is
established. If this is the case, it is recommended that you select a network number from
192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.0. The Internet Assigned Number Authority (IANA) reserved this
block of addresses specifically for private use; please do not use any other number unless you
are told otherwise. You must also enable Network Address Translation (NAT) on the
NBG334S.
Once you have decided on the network number, pick an IP address for your NBG334S that is
easy to remember (for instance, 192.168.1.1) but make sure that no other device on your
network is using that IP address.
The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your NBG334S will
compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered. You don't
need to change the subnet mask computed by the NBG334S unless you are instructed to do
otherwise.
Private IP Addresses
Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address. If your networks are isolated from
the Internet (running only between two branch offices, for example) you can assign any IP
addresses to the hosts without problems. However, the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority
(IANA) has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private
networks:
• 10.0.0.0 — 10.255.255.255
• 172.16.0.0 — 172.31.255.255
• 192.168.0.0 — 192.168.255.255
You can obtain your IP address from the IANA, from an ISP, or it can be assigned from a
private network. If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an
ISP, the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks. On the other
hand, if you are part of a much larger organization, you should consult your network
administrator for the appropriate IP addresses.
Regardless of your particular situation, do not create an arbitrary IP address; always follow the
guidelines above. For more information on address assignment, please refer to RFC 1597,
Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466, Guidelines for Management of IP
Address Space.
14 255.255.255.252 (/30) 16384 2
15 255.255.255.254 (/31) 32768 1
Table 109 16-bit Network Number Subnet Planning (continued)
NO. “BORROWED”
HOST BITS
SUBNET MASK NO. SUBNETS
NO. HOSTS PER
SUBNET
NBG334S User’s Guide
231
APPENDIX D
Setting up Your Computer’s IP
Address
All computers must have a 10M or 100M Ethernet adapter card and TCP/IP installed.
Windows 95/98/Me/NT/2000/XP, Macintosh OS 7 and later operating systems and all
versions of UNIX/LINUX include the software components you need to install and use TCP/
IP on your computer. Windows 3.1 requires the purchase of a third-party TCP/IP application
package.
TCP/IP should already be installed on computers using Windows NT/2000/XP, Macintosh OS
7 and later operating systems.
After the appropriate TCP/IP components are installed, configure the TCP/IP settings in order
to "communicate" with your network.
If you manually assign IP information instead of using dynamic assignment, make sure that
your computers have IP addresses that place them in the same subnet as the Prestige’s LAN
port.
Windows 95/98/Me
Click Start, Settings, Control Panel and double-click the Network icon to open the Network
window.
Appendix D Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
NBG334S User’s Guide
232
Figure 134 WIndows 95/98/Me: Network: Configuration
Installing Components
The Network window Configuration tab displays a list of installed components. You need a
network adapter, the TCP/IP protocol and Client for Microsoft Networks.
If you need the adapter:
1 In the Network window, click Add.
2 Select Adapter and then click Add.
3 Select the manufacturer and model of your network adapter and then click OK.
If you need TCP/IP:
1 In the Network window, click Add.
2 Select Protocol and then click Add.
3 Select Microsoft from the list of manufacturers.
4 Select TCP/IP from the list of network protocols and then click OK.
If you need Client for Microsoft Networks:
1 Click Add.
2 Select Client and then click Add.
3 Select Microsoft from the list of manufacturers.
4 Select Client for Microsoft Networks from the list of network clients and then click
OK.
5 Restart your computer so the changes you made take effect.
Appendix D Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
NBG334S User’s Guide
233
Configuring
1 In the Network window Configuration tab, select your network adapter's TCP/IP entry
and click Properties
2 Click the IP Address tab.
• If your IP address is dynamic, select Obtain an IP address automatically.
• If you have a static IP address, select Specify an IP address and type your
information into the IP Address and Subnet Mask fields.
Figure 135 Windows 95/98/Me: TCP/IP Properties: IP Address
3 Click the DNS Configuration tab.
• If you do not know your DNS information, select Disable DNS.
• If you know your DNS information, select Enable DNS and type the information in
the fields below (you may not need to fill them all in).
Appendix D Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
NBG334S User’s Guide
234
Figure 136 Windows 95/98/Me: TCP/IP Properties: DNS Configuration
4 Click the Gateway tab.
• If you do not know your gateway’s IP address, remove previously installed gateways.
• If you have a gateway IP address, type it in the New gateway field and click Add.
5 Click OK to save and close the TCP/IP Properties window.
6 Click OK to close the Network window. Insert the Windows CD if prompted.
7 Turn on your Prestige and restart your computer when prompted.
Verifying Settings
1 Click Start and then Run.
2 In the Run window, type "winipcfg" and then click OK to open the IP Configuration
window.
3 Select your network adapter. You should see your computer's IP address, subnet mask
and default gateway.
Windows 2000/NT/XP
The following example figures use the default Windows XP GUI theme.
1 Click start (Start in Windows 2000/NT), Settings, Control Panel.
Appendix D Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
NBG334S User’s Guide
235
Figure 137 Windows XP: Start Menu
2 In the Control Panel, double-click Network Connections (Network and Dial-up
Connections in Windows 2000/NT).
Figure 138 Windows XP: Control Panel
3 Right-click Local Area Connection and then click Properties.
Appendix D Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
NBG334S User’s Guide
236
Figure 139 Windows XP: Control Panel: Network Connections: Properties
4 Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) (under the General tab in Win XP) and then click
Properties.
Figure 140 Windows XP: Local Area Connection Properties
5 The Internet Protocol TCP/IP Properties window opens (the General tab in
Windows XP).
• If you have a dynamic IP address click Obtain an IP address automatically.
• If you have a static IP address click Use the following IP Address and fill in the IP
address, Subnet mask, and Default gateway fields.
• Click Advanced.
Appendix D Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
NBG334S User’s Guide
237
Figure 141 Windows XP: Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties
6 If you do not know your gateway's IP address, remove any previously installed
gateways in the IP Settings tab and click OK.
Do one or more of the following if you want to configure additional IP addresses:
•In the IP Settings tab, in IP addresses, click Add.
•In TCP/IP Address, type an IP address in IP address and a subnet mask in Subnet
mask, and then click Add.
• Repeat the above two steps for each IP address you want to add.
• Configure additional default gateways in the IP Settings tab by clicking Add in
Default gateways.
•In TCP/IP Gateway Address, type the IP address of the default gateway in Gateway.
To manually configure a default metric (the number of transmission hops), clear the
Automatic metric check box and type a metric in Metric.
• Click Add.
• Repeat the previous three steps for each default gateway you want to add.
• Click OK when finished.
Appendix D Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
NBG334S User’s Guide
238
Figure 142 Windows XP: Advanced TCP/IP Properties
7 In the Internet Protocol TCP/IP Properties window (the General tab in Windows
XP):
• Click Obtain DNS server address automatically if you do not know your DNS
server IP address(es).
• If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click Use the following DNS server
addresses, and type them in the Preferred DNS server and Alternate DNS server
fields.
If you have previously configured DNS servers, click Advanced and then the DNS
tab to order them.
Appendix D Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
NBG334S User’s Guide
239
Figure 143 Windows XP: Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties
8 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window.
9 Click Close (OK in Windows 2000/NT) to close the Local Area Connection
Properties window.
10 Close the Network Connections window (Network and Dial-up Connections in
Windows 2000/NT).
11 Turn on your Prestige and restart your computer (if prompted).
Verifying Settings
1 Click Start, All Programs, Accessories and then Command Prompt.
2 In the Command Prompt window, type "ipconfig" and then press [ENTER]. You can
also open Network Connections, right-click a network connection, click Status and
then click the Support tab.
Macintosh OS 8/9
1 Click the Apple menu, Control Panel and double-click TCP/IP to open the TCP/IP
Control Panel.
Appendix D Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
NBG334S User’s Guide
240
Figure 144 Macintosh OS 8/9: Apple Menu
2 Select Ethernet built-in from the Connect via list.
Figure 145 Macintosh OS 8/9: TCP/IP
3 For dynamically assigned settings, select Using DHCP Server from the Configure: list.
4 For statically assigned settings, do the following:
Appendix D Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
NBG334S User’s Guide
241
•From the Configure box, select Manually.
• Type your IP address in the IP Address box.
• Type your subnet mask in the Subnet mask box.
• Type the IP address of your Prestige in the Router address box.
5 Close the TCP/IP Control Panel.
6 Click Save if prompted, to save changes to your configuration.
7 Turn on your Prestige and restart your computer (if prompted).
Verifying Settings
Check your TCP/IP properties in the TCP/IP Control Panel window.
Macintosh OS X
1 Click the Apple menu, and click System Preferences to open the System Preferences
window.
Figure 146 Macintosh OS X: Apple Menu
2 Click Network in the icon bar.
• Select Automatic from the Location list.
• Select Built-in Ethernet from the Show list.
• Click the TCP/IP tab.
3 For dynamically assigned settings, select Using DHCP from the Configure list.
Appendix D Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
NBG334S User’s Guide
242
Figure 147 Macintosh OS X: Network
4 For statically assigned settings, do the following:
•From the Configure box, select Manually.
• Type your IP address in the IP Address box.
• Type your subnet mask in the Subnet mask box.
• Type the IP address of your Prestige in the Router address box.
5 Click Apply Now and close the window.
6 Turn on your Prestige and restart your computer (if prompted).
Verifying Settings
Check your TCP/IP properties in the Network window.
Linux
This section shows you how to configure your computer’s TCP/IP settings in Red Hat Linux
9.0. Procedure, screens and file location may vary depending on your Linux distribution and
release version.
Appendix D Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
NBG334S User’s Guide
243
" Make sure you are logged in as the root administrator.
Using the K Desktop Environment (KDE)
Follow the steps below to configure your computer IP address using the KDE.
1 Click the Red Hat button (located on the bottom left corner), select System Setting and
click Network.
Figure 148 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Network Configuration: Devices
2 Double-click on the profile of the network card you wish to configure. The Ethernet
Device General screen displays as shown.
Appendix D Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
NBG334S User’s Guide
244
Figure 149 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Ethernet Device: General
• If you have a dynamic IP address click Automatically obtain IP address settings
with and select dhcp from the drop down list.
• If you have a static IP address click Statically set IP Addresses and fill in the
Address, Subnet mask, and Default Gateway Address fields.
3 Click OK to save the changes and close the Ethernet Device General screen.
4 If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click the DNS tab in the Network
Configuration screen. Enter the DNS server information in the fields provided.
Figure 150 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Network Configuration: DNS
5 Click the Devices tab.
6 Click the Activate button to apply the changes. The following screen displays. Click Yes
to save the changes in all screens.
Appendix D Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
NBG334S User’s Guide
245
Figure 151 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Network Configuration: Activate
7 After the network card restart process is complete, make sure the Status is Active in the
Network Configuration screen.
Using Configuration Files
Follow the steps below to edit the network configuration files and set your computer IP
address.
1 Assuming that you have only one network card on the computer, locate the
ifconfig-
eth0
configuration file (where eth0 is the name of the Ethernet card). Open the
configuration file with any plain text editor.
• If you have a dynamic IP address, enter
dhcp in the BOOTPROTO= field. The following
figure shows an example.
Figure 152 Red Hat 9.0: Dynamic IP Address Setting in ifconfig-eth0
• If you have a static IP address, enter static in the BOOTPROTO= field. Type
IPADDR= followed by the IP address (in dotted decimal notation) and type NETMASK=
followed by the subnet mask. The following example shows an example where the
static IP address is 192.168.1.10 and the subnet mask is 255.255.255.0.
Figure 153 Red Hat 9.0: Static IP Address Setting in ifconfig-eth0
DEVICE=eth0
ONBOOT=yes
BOOTPROTO=dhcp
USERCTL=no
PEERDNS=yes
TYPE=Ethernet
DEVICE=eth0
ONBOOT=yes
BOOTPROTO=static
IPADDR=192.168.1.10
NETMASK=255.255.255.0
USERCTL=no
PEERDNS=yes
TYPE=Ethernet
Appendix D Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
NBG334S User’s Guide
246
2 If you know your DNS server IP address(es), enter the DNS server information in the
resolv.conf file in the /etc directory. The following figure shows an example where
two DNS server IP addresses are specified.
Figure 154 Red Hat 9.0: DNS Settings in resolv.conf
3 After you edit and save the configuration files, you must restart the network card.
Enter
./network restart in the /etc/rc.d/init.d directory. The following
figure shows an example.
Figure 155 Red Hat 9.0: Restart Ethernet Card
23.6.1 Verifying Settings
Enter ifconfig in a terminal screen to check your TCP/IP properties.
Figure 156 Red Hat 9.0: Checking TCP/IP Properties
nameserver 172.23.5.1
nameserver 172.23.5.2
[root@localhost init.d]# network restart
Shutting down interface eth0: [OK]
Shutting down loopback interface: [OK]
Setting network parameters: [OK]
Bringing up loopback interface: [OK]
Bringing up interface eth0: [OK]
[root@localhost]# ifconfig
eth0 Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:50:BA:72:5B:44
inet addr:172.23.19.129 Bcast:172.23.19.255 Mask:255.255.255.0
UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST MTU:1500 Metric:1
RX packets:717 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0
TX packets:13 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0
collisions:0 txqueuelen:100
RX bytes:730412 (713.2 Kb) TX bytes:1570 (1.5 Kb)
Interrupt:10 Base address:0x1000
[root@localhost]#
NBG334S User’s Guide
247
APPENDIX E
Wireless LANs
Wireless LAN Topologies
This section discusses ad-hoc and infrastructure wireless LAN topologies.
Ad-hoc Wireless LAN Configuration
The simplest WLAN configuration is an independent (Ad-hoc) WLAN that connects a set of
computers with wireless stations (A, B, C). Any time two or more wireless adapters are within
range of each other, they can set up an independent network, which is commonly referred to as
an Ad-hoc network or Independent Basic Service Set (IBSS). The following diagram shows an
example of notebook computers using wireless adapters to form an Ad-hoc wireless LAN.
Figure 157 Peer-to-Peer Communication in an Ad-hoc Network
BSS
A Basic Service Set (BSS) exists when all communications between wireless stations or
between a wireless station and a wired network client go through one access point (AP).
Intra-BSS traffic is traffic between wireless stations in the BSS. When Intra-BSS is enabled,
wireless station A and B can access the wired network and communicate with each other.
When Intra-BSS is disabled, wireless station A and B can still access the wired network but
cannot communicate with each other.
Appendix E Wireless LANs
NBG334S User’s Guide
248
Figure 158 Basic Service Set
ESS
An Extended Service Set (ESS) consists of a series of overlapping BSSs, each containing an
access point, with each access point connected together by a wired network. This wired
connection between APs is called a Distribution System (DS).
This type of wireless LAN topology is called an Infrastructure WLAN. The Access Points not
only provide communication with the wired network but also mediate wireless network traffic
in the immediate neighborhood.
An ESSID (ESS IDentification) uniquely identifies each ESS. All access points and their
associated wireless stations within the same ESS must have the same ESSID in order to
communicate.
Appendix E Wireless LANs
NBG334S User’s Guide
249
Figure 159 Infrastructure WLAN
Channel
A channel is the radio frequency(ies) used by IEEE 802.11a/b/g wireless devices. Channels
available depend on your geographical area. You may have a choice of channels (for your
region) so you should use a different channel than an adjacent AP (access point) to reduce
interference. Interference occurs when radio signals from different access points overlap
causing interference and degrading performance.
Adjacent channels partially overlap however. To avoid interference due to overlap, your AP
should be on a channel at least five channels away from a channel that an adjacent AP is using.
For example, if your region has 11 channels and an adjacent AP is using channel 1, then you
need to select a channel between 6 or 11.
RTS/CTS
A hidden node occurs when two stations are within range of the same access point, but are not
within range of each other. The following figure illustrates a hidden node. Both stations (STA)
are within range of the access point (AP) or wireless gateway, but out-of-range of each other,
so they cannot "hear" each other, that is they do not know if the channel is currently being
used. Therefore, they are considered hidden from each other.
Appendix E Wireless LANs
NBG334S User’s Guide
250
Figure 160 RTS/CTS
When station A sends data to the AP, it might not know that the station B is already using the
channel. If these two stations send data at the same time, collisions may occur when both sets
of data arrive at the AP at the same time, resulting in a loss of messages for both stations.
RTS/CTS is designed to prevent collisions due to hidden nodes. An RTS/CTS defines the
biggest size data frame you can send before an RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send)
handshake is invoked.
When a data frame exceeds the RTS/CTS value you set (between 0 to 2432 bytes), the station
that wants to transmit this frame must first send an RTS (Request To Send) message to the AP
for permission to send it. The AP then responds with a CTS (Clear to Send) message to all
other stations within its range to notify them to defer their transmission. It also reserves and
confirms with the requesting station the time frame for the requested transmission.
Stations can send frames smaller than the specified RTS/CTS directly to the AP without the
RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake.
You should only configure RTS/CTS if the possibility of hidden nodes exists on your network
and the "cost" of resending large frames is more than the extra network overhead involved in
the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake.
If the RTS/CTS value is greater than the Fragmentation Threshold value (see next), then the
RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake will never occur as data frames will
be fragmented before they reach RTS/CTS size.
" Enabling the RTS Threshold causes redundant network overhead that could
negatively affect the throughput performance instead of providing a remedy.
Fragmentation Threshold
A Fragmentation Threshold is the maximum data fragment size (between 256 and 2432
bytes) that can be sent in the wireless network before the AP will fragment the packet into
smaller data frames.
A large Fragmentation Threshold is recommended for networks not prone to interference
while you should set a smaller threshold for busy networks or networks that are prone to
interference.
Appendix E Wireless LANs
NBG334S User’s Guide
251
If the Fragmentation Threshold value is smaller than the RTS/CTS value (see previously)
you set then the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake will never occur as
data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS/CTS size.
Preamble Type
A preamble is used to synchronize the transmission timing in your wireless network. There are
two preamble modes: Long and Short.
Short preamble takes less time to process and minimizes overhead, so it should be used in a
good wireless network environment when all wireless stations support it.
Select Long if you have a ‘noisy’ network or are unsure of what preamble mode your wireless
stations support as all IEEE 802.11b compliant wireless adapters must support long preamble.
However, not all wireless adapters support short preamble. Use long preamble if you are
unsure what preamble mode the wireless adapters support, to ensure interpretability between
the AP and the wireless stations and to provide more reliable communication in ‘noisy’
networks.
Select Dynamic to have the AP automatically use short preamble when all wireless stations
support it, otherwise the AP uses long preamble.
" The AP and the wireless stations MUST use the same preamble mode in order
to communicate.
IEEE 802.11g Wireless LAN
IEEE 802.11g is fully compatible with the IEEE 802.11b standard. This means an IEEE
802.11b adapter can interface directly with an IEEE 802.11g access point (and vice versa) at
11 Mbps or lower depending on range. IEEE 802.11g has several intermediate rate steps
between the maximum and minimum data rates. The IEEE 802.11g data rate and modulation
are as follows:
IEEE 802.1x
In June 2001, the IEEE 802.1x standard was designed to extend the features of IEEE 802.11 to
support extended authentication as well as providing additional accounting and control
features. It is supported by Windows XP and a number of network devices. Some advantages
of IEEE 802.1x are:
Table 110 IEEE 802.11g
DATA RATE (MBPS) MODULATION
1 DBPSK (Differential Binary Phase Shift Keyed)
2 DQPSK (Differential Quadrature Phase Shift Keying)
5.5 / 11 CCK (Complementary Code Keying)
6/9/12/18/24/36/48/54 OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing)
Appendix E Wireless LANs
NBG334S User’s Guide
252
• User based identification that allows for roaming.
• Support for RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial In User Service, RFC 2138, 2139) for
centralized user profile and accounting management on a network RADIUS server.
• Support for EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol, RFC 2486) that allows additional
authentication methods to be deployed with no changes to the access point or the wireless
stations.
RADIUS
RADIUS is based on a client-server model that supports authentication, authorization and
accounting. The access point is the client and the server is the RADIUS server. The RADIUS
server handles the following tasks:
• Authentication
Determines the identity of the users.
• Authorization
Determines the network services available to authenticated users once they are connected
to the network.
• Accounting
Keeps track of the client’s network activity.
RADIUS is a simple package exchange in which your AP acts as a message relay between the
wireless station and the network RADIUS server.
Types of RADIUS Messages
The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the
RADIUS server for user authentication:
• Access-Request
Sent by an access point requesting authentication.
• Access-Reject
Sent by a RADIUS server rejecting access.
• Access-Accept
Sent by a RADIUS server allowing access.
• Access-Challenge
Sent by a RADIUS server requesting more information in order to allow access. The
access point sends a proper response from the user and then sends another Access-Request
message.
The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the
RADIUS server for user accounting:
• Accounting-Request
Sent by the access point requesting accounting.
• Accounting-Response
Sent by the RADIUS server to indicate that it has started or stopped accounting.
Appendix E Wireless LANs
NBG334S User’s Guide
253
In order to ensure network security, the access point and the RADIUS server use a shared
secret key, which is a password, they both know. The key is not sent over the network. In
addition to the shared key, password information exchanged is also encrypted to protect the
network from unauthorized access.
Types of Authentication
This appendix discusses some popular authentication types: EAP-MD5, EAP-TLS, EAP-
TTLS, PEAP and LEAP.
The type of authentication you use depends on the RADIUS server or the AP. Consult your
network administrator for more information.
EAP-MD5 (Message-Digest Algorithm 5)
MD5 authentication is the simplest one-way authentication method. The authentication server
sends a challenge to the wireless station. The wireless station ‘proves’ that it knows the
password by encrypting the password with the challenge and sends back the information.
Password is not sent in plain text.
However, MD5 authentication has some weaknesses. Since the authentication server needs to
get the plaintext passwords, the passwords must be stored. Thus someone other than the
authentication server may access the password file. In addition, it is possible to impersonate an
authentication server as MD5 authentication method does not perform mutual authentication.
Finally, MD5 authentication method does not support data encryption with dynamic session
key. You must configure WEP encryption keys for data encryption.
EAP-TLS (Transport Layer Security)
With EAP-TLS, digital certifications are needed by both the server and the wireless stations
for mutual authentication. The server presents a certificate to the client. After validating the
identity of the server, the client sends a different certificate to the server. The exchange of
certificates is done in the open before a secured tunnel is created. This makes user identity
vulnerable to passive attacks. A digital certificate is an electronic ID card that authenticates the
sender’s identity. However, to implement EAP-TLS, you need a Certificate Authority (CA) to
handle certificates, which imposes a management overhead.
EAP-TTLS (Tunneled Transport Layer Service)
EAP-TTLS is an extension of the EAP-TLS authentication that uses certificates for only the
server-side authentications to establish a secure connection. Client authentication is then done
by sending username and password through the secure connection, thus client identity is
protected. For client authentication, EAP-TTLS supports EAP methods and legacy
authentication methods such as PAP, CHAP, MS-CHAP and MS-CHAP v2.
Appendix E Wireless LANs
NBG334S User’s Guide
254
PEAP (Protected EAP)
Like EAP-TTLS, server-side certificate authentication is used to establish a secure connection,
then use simple username and password methods through the secured connection to
authenticate the clients, thus hiding client identity. However, PEAP only supports EAP
methods, such as EAP-MD5, EAP-MSCHAPv2 and EAP-GTC (EAP-Generic Token Card),
for client authentication. EAP-GTC is implemented only by Cisco.
LEAP
LEAP (Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol) is a Cisco implementation of IEEE
802.1x.
Dynamic WEP Key Exchange
The AP maps a unique key that is generated with the RADIUS server. This key expires when
the wireless connection times out, disconnects or reauthentication times out. A new WEP key
is generated each time reauthentication is performed.
If this feature is enabled, it is not necessary to configure a default encryption key in the
Wireless screen. You may still configure and store keys here, but they will not be used while
Dynamic WEP is enabled.
" EAP-MD5 cannot be used with dynamic WEP key exchange
For added security, certificate-based authentications (EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS and PEAP) use
dynamic keys for data encryption. They are often deployed in corporate environments, but for
public deployment, a simple user name and password pair is more practical. The following
table is a comparison of the features of authentication types.
WPA(2)
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 802.11i standard. WPA2 (IEEE
802.11i) is a wireless security standard that defines stronger encryption, authentication and
key management than WPA.
Table 111 Comparison of EAP Authentication Types
EAP-MD5 EAP-TLS EAP-TTLS PEAP LEAP
Mutual Authentication No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Certificate – Client No Yes Optional Optional No
Certificate – Server No Yes Yes Yes No
Dynamic Key Exchange No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Credential Integrity None Strong Strong Strong Moderate
Deployment Difficulty Easy Hard Moderate Moderate Moderate
Client Identity Protection No No Yes Yes No
Appendix E Wireless LANs
NBG334S User’s Guide
255
Key differences between WPA(2) and WEP are improved data encryption and user
authentication.
Encryption
Both WPA and WPA2 improve data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol
(TKIP), Message Integrity Check (MIC) and IEEE 802.1x. In addition to TKIP, WPA2 also
uses Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) in the Counter mode with Cipher block chaining
Message authentication code Protocol (CCMP) to offer stronger encryption.
Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP) uses 128-bit keys that are dynamically generated and
distributed by the authentication server. It includes a per-packet key mixing function, a
Message Integrity Check (MIC) named Michael, an extended initialization vector (IV) with
sequencing rules, and a re-keying mechanism.
TKIP regularly changes and rotates the encryption keys so that the same encryption key is
never used twice. The RADIUS server distributes a Pairwise Master Key (PMK) key to the AP
that then sets up a key hierarchy and management system, using the pair-wise key to
dynamically generate unique data encryption keys to encrypt every data packet that is
wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients. This all happens in the
background automatically.
WPA2 AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) is a block cipher that uses a 256-bit
mathematical algorithm called Rijndael.
The Message Integrity Check (MIC) is designed to prevent an attacker from capturing data
packets, altering them and resending them. The MIC provides a strong mathematical function
in which the receiver and the transmitter each compute and then compare the MIC. If they do
not match, it is assumed that the data has been tampered with and the packet is dropped.
By generating unique data encryption keys for every data packet and by creating an integrity
checking mechanism (MIC), TKIP makes it much more difficult to decode data on a Wi-Fi
network than WEP, making it difficult for an intruder to break into the network.
The encryption mechanisms used for WPA and WPA-PSK are the same. The only difference
between the two is that WPA-PSK uses a simple common password, instead of user-specific
credentials. The common-password approach makes WPA-PSK susceptible to brute-force
password-guessing attacks but it's still an improvement over WEP as it employs an easier-to-
use, consistent, single, alphanumeric password.
User Authentication
WPA or WPA2 applies IEEE 802.1x and Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) to
authenticate wireless clients using an external RADIUS database.
If both an AP and the wireless clients support WPA2 and you have an external RADIUS
server, use WPA2 for stronger data encryption. If you don't have an external RADIUS server,
you should use WPA2 -PSK (WPA2 -Pre-Shared Key) that only requires a single (identical)
password entered into each access point, wireless gateway and wireless client. As long as the
passwords match, a wireless client will be granted access to a WLAN.
If the AP or the wireless clients do not support WPA2, just use WPA or WPA-PSK depending
on whether you have an external RADIUS server or not.
Select WEP only when the AP and/or wireless clients do not support WPA or WPA2. WEP is
less secure than WPA or WPA2.
Appendix E Wireless LANs
NBG334S User’s Guide
256
23.6.2 WPA(2)-PSK Application Example
A WPA(2)-PSK application looks as follows.
1 First enter identical passwords into the AP and all wireless clients. The Pre-Shared Key
(PSK) must consist of between 8 and 63 ASCII characters (including spaces and
symbols).
2 The AP checks each wireless client's password and (only) allows it to join the network if
the password matches.
3 The AP derives and distributes keys to the wireless clients.
4 The AP and wireless clients use the TKIP or AES encryption process to encrypt data
exchanged between them.
Figure 161 WPA(2)-PSK Authentication
23.6.3 WPA(2) with RADIUS Application Example
You need the IP address of the RADIUS server, its port number (default is 1812), and the
RADIUS shared secret. A WPA(2) application example with an external RADIUS server
looks as follows. "A" is the RADIUS server. "DS" is the distribution system.
1 The AP passes the wireless client's authentication request to the RADIUS server.
2 The RADIUS server then checks the user's identification against its database and grants
or denies network access accordingly.
3 The RADIUS server distributes a Pairwise Master Key (PMK) key to the AP that then
sets up a key hierarchy and management system, using the pair-wise key to dynamically
generate unique data encryption keys to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly
communicated between the AP and the wireless clients.
Appendix E Wireless LANs
NBG334S User’s Guide
257
Security Parameters Summary
Refer to this table to see what other security parameters you should configure for each
Authentication Method/ key management protocol type. MAC address filters are not
dependent on how you configure these security features.
Table 112 Wireless Security Relational Matrix
AUTHENTICATION
METHOD/ KEY
MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL
ENCRYPTIO
N METHOD
ENTER
MANUAL KEY
IEEE 802.1X
Open None No Disable
Enable without Dynamic WEP
Key
Open WEP No Enable with Dynamic WEP Key
Yes Enable without Dynamic WEP
Key
Yes Disable
Shared WEP No Enable with Dynamic WEP Key
Yes Enable without Dynamic WEP
Key
Yes Disable
WPA TKIP No Enable
WPA-PSK TKIP Yes Enable
WPA2 AES No Enable
WPA2-PSK AES Yes Enable
Appendix E Wireless LANs
NBG334S User’s Guide
258
NBG334S User’s Guide
259
APPENDIX F
Services
The following table lists some commonly-used services and their associated protocols and port
numbers.
• Name: This is a short, descriptive name for the service. You can use this one or create a
different one, if you like.
• Protocol: This is the type of IP protocol used by the service. If this is TCP/UDP, then the
service uses the same port number with TCP and UDP. If this is User-Defined, the Port(s)
is the IP protocol number, not the port number.
• Port(s): This value depends on the Protocol.
• If the Protocol is TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP, this is the IP port number.
• If the Protocol is USER, this is the IP protocol number.
• Description: This is a brief explanation of the applications that use this service or the
situations in which this service is used.
Table 113 Examples of Services
NAME PROTOCOL PORT(S) DESCRIPTION
AH
(IPSEC_TUNNEL)
User-Defined 51 The IPSEC AH (Authentication Header)
tunneling protocol uses this service.
AIM TCP 5190 AOL’s Internet Messenger service.
AUTH TCP 113 Authentication protocol used by some
servers.
BGP TCP 179 Border Gateway Protocol.
BOOTP_CLIENT UDP 68 DHCP Client.
BOOTP_SERVER UDP 67 DHCP Server.
CU-SEEME TCP/UDP
TCP/UDP
7648
24032
A popular videoconferencing solution from
White Pines Software.
DNS TCP/UDP 53 Domain Name Server, a service that
matches web names (e.g. www.zyxel.com
)
to IP numbers.
ESP
(IPSEC_TUNNEL)
User-Defined 50 The IPSEC ESP (Encapsulation Security
Protocol) tunneling protocol uses this
service.
FINGER TCP 79 Finger is a UNIX or Internet related
command that can be used to find out if a
user is logged on.
FTP TCP
TCP
20
21
File Transfer Program, a program to enable
fast transfer of files, including large files that
may not be possible by e-mail.
Appendix F Services
NBG334S User’s Guide
260
H.323 TCP 1720 NetMeeting uses this protocol.
HTTP TCP 80 Hyper Text Transfer Protocol - a client/
server protocol for the world wide web.
HTTPS TCP 443 HTTPS is a secured http session often used
in e-commerce.
ICMP User-Defined 1 Internet Control Message Protocol is often
used for diagnostic purposes.
ICQ UDP 4000 This is a popular Internet chat program.
IGMP (MULTICAST) User-Defined 2 Internet Group Multicast Protocol is used
when sending packets to a specific group of
hosts.
IKE UDP 500 The Internet Key Exchange algorithm is
used for key distribution and management.
IMAP4 TCP 143 The Internet Message Access Protocol is
used for e-mail.
IMAP4S TCP 993 This is a more secure version of IMAP4 that
runs over SSL.
IRC TCP/UDP 6667 This is another popular Internet chat
program.
MSN Messenger TCP 1863 Microsoft Networks’ messenger service
uses this protocol.
NetBIOS TCP/UDP
TCP/UDP
TCP/UDP
TCP/UDP
137
138
139
445
The Network Basic Input/Output System is
used for communication between
computers in a LAN.
NEW-ICQ TCP 5190 An Internet chat program.
NEWS TCP 144 A protocol for news groups.
NFS UDP 2049 Network File System - NFS is a client/
server distributed file service that provides
transparent file sharing for network
environments.
NNTP TCP 119 Network News Transport Protocol is the
delivery mechanism for the USENET
newsgroup service.
PING User-Defined 1 Packet INternet Groper is a protocol that
sends out ICMP echo requests to test
whether or not a remote host is reachable.
POP3 TCP 110 Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a client
computer get e-mail from a POP3 server
through a temporary connection (TCP/IP or
other).
POP3S TCP 995 This is a more secure version of POP3 that
runs over SSL.
PPTP TCP 1723 Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol enables
secure transfer of data over public
networks. This is the control channel.
Table 113 Examples of Services (continued)
NAME PROTOCOL PORT(S) DESCRIPTION
Appendix F Services
NBG334S User’s Guide
261
PPTP_TUNNEL
(GRE)
User-Defined 47 PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol)
enables secure transfer of data over public
networks. This is the data channel.
RCMD TCP 512 Remote Command Service.
REAL_AUDIO TCP 7070 A streaming audio service that enables real
time sound over the web.
REXEC TCP 514 Remote Execution Daemon.
RLOGIN TCP 513 Remote Login.
ROADRUNNER TCP/UDP 1026 This is an ISP that provides services mainly
for cable modems.
RTELNET TCP 107 Remote Telnet.
RTSP TCP/UDP 554 The Real Time Streaming (media control)
Protocol (RTSP) is a remote control for
multimedia on the Internet.
SFTP TCP 115 The Simple File Transfer Protocol is an old
way of transferring files between
computers.
SMTP TCP 25 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the
message-exchange standard for the
Internet. SMTP enables you to move
messages from one e-mail server to
another.
SMTPS TCP 465 This is a more secure version of SMTP that
runs over SSL.
SNMP TCP/UDP 161 Simple Network Management Program.
SNMP-TRAPS TCP/UDP 162 Traps for use with the SNMP (RFC:1215).
SQL-NET TCP 1521 Structured Query Language is an interface
to access data on many different types of
database systems, including mainframes,
midrange systems, UNIX systems and
network servers.
SSDP UDP 1900 The Simple Service Discovery Protocol
supports Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP).
SSH TCP/UDP 22 Secure Shell Remote Login Program.
STRM WORKS UDP 1558 Stream Works Protocol.
SYSLOG UDP 514 Syslog allows you to send system logs to a
UNIX server.
TACACS UDP 49 Login Host Protocol used for (Terminal
Access Controller Access Control System).
TELNET TCP 23 Telnet is the login and terminal emulation
protocol common on the Internet and in
UNIX environments. It operates over TCP/
IP networks. Its primary function is to allow
users to log into remote host systems.
Table 113 Examples of Services (continued)
NAME PROTOCOL PORT(S) DESCRIPTION
Appendix F Services
NBG334S User’s Guide
262
TFTP UDP 69 Trivial File Transfer Protocol is an Internet
file transfer protocol similar to FTP, but
uses the UDP (User Datagram Protocol)
rather than TCP (Transmission Control
Protocol).
VDOLIVE TCP
UDP
7000
user-
defined
A videoconferencing solution. The UDP port
number is specified in the application.
Table 113 Examples of Services (continued)
NAME PROTOCOL PORT(S) DESCRIPTION
NBG334S User’s Guide
263
APPENDIX G
Legal Information
Copyright
Copyright © 2006 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation.
The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole, transcribed,
stored in a retrieval system, translated into any language, or transmitted in any form or by any
means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, photocopying, manual, or
otherwise, without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation.
Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation. All rights reserved.
Disclaimer
ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products, or
software described herein. Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the
patent rights of others. ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products
described herein without notice. This publication is subject to change without notice.
Trademarks
ZyNOS (ZyXEL Network Operating System) is a registered trademark of ZyXEL
Communications, Inc. Other trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for
identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners.
Certifications
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Interference Statement
The device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operations.
This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This device generates,
uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if not installed and used in accordance with
the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is
no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
Appendix G Legal Information
NBG334S User’s Guide
264
If this device does cause harmful interference to radio/television reception, which can be
determined by turning the device off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
1 Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
2 Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.
3 Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the
receiver is connected.
4 Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
FCC Radiation Exposure Statement
• This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna
or transmitter.
• IEEE 802.11b or 802.11g operation of this product in the U.S.A. is firmware-limited to
channels 1 through 11.
• To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, a separation distance of at
least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons.
注意 !
依據 低功率電波輻射性電機管理辦法
第十二條 經型式認證合格之低功率射頻電機，非經許可，公司、商號或使用
者均不得擅自變更頻率、加大功率或變更原設計之特性及功能。
第十四條 低功率射頻電機之使用不得影響飛航安全及干擾合法通信；經發現
有干擾現象時，應立即停用，並改善至無干擾時方得繼續使用。
前項合法通信，指依電信規定作業之無線電信。低功率射頻電機須忍
受合法通信或工業、科學及醫療用電波輻射性電機設備之干擾。
本機限在不干擾合法電臺與不受被干擾保障條件下於室內使用。
Notices
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
This device has been designed for the WLAN 2.4 GHz network throughout the EC region and
Switzerland, with restrictions in France.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
Viewing Certifications
1 Go to http://www.zyxel.com
.
2 Select your product on the ZyXEL home page to go to that product's page.
Appendix G Legal Information
NBG334S User’s Guide
265
3 Select the certification you wish to view from this page.
ZyXEL Limited Warranty
ZyXEL warrants to the original end user (purchaser) that this product is free from any defects
in materials or workmanship for a period of up to two years from the date of purchase. During
the warranty period, and upon proof of purchase, should the product have indications of failure
due to faulty workmanship and/or materials, ZyXEL will, at its discretion, repair or replace the
defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor, and to whatever
extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating
condition. Any replacement will consist of a new or re-manufactured functionally equivalent
product of equal or higher value, and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL. This warranty
shall not apply if the product has been modified, misused, tampered with, damaged by an act
of God, or subjected to abnormal working conditions.
Note
Repair or replacement, as provided under this warranty, is the exclusive remedy of the
purchaser. This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, express or implied, including any
implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose. ZyXEL shall in
no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser.
To obtain the services of this warranty, contact ZyXEL's Service Center for your Return
Material Authorization number (RMA). Products must be returned Postage Prepaid. It is
recommended that the unit be insured when shipped. Any returned products without proof of
purchase or those with an out-dated warranty will be repaired or replaced (at the discretion of
ZyXEL) and the customer will be billed for parts and labor. All repaired or replaced products
will be shipped by ZyXEL to the corresponding return address, Postage Paid. This warranty
gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights that vary from country to
country.
Registration
Register your product online to receive e-mail notices of firmware upgrades and information
at www.zyxel.com for global products, or at www.us.zyxel.com for North American products.
Appendix G Legal Information
NBG334S User’s Guide
266
NBG334S User’s Guide
267
APPENDIX A
Customer Support
Please have the following information ready when you contact customer support.
Required Information
• Product model and serial number.
• Warranty Information.
• Date that you received your device.
• Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it.
“+” is the (prefix) number you dial to make an international telephone call.
Corporate Headquarters (Worldwide)
• Support E-mail: support@zyxel.com.tw
• Sales E-mail: sales@zyxel.com.tw
• Telephone: +886-3-578-3942
• Fax: +886-3-578-2439
• Web: www.zyxel.com, www.europe.zyxel.com
• FTP: ftp.zyxel.com, ftp.europe.zyxel.com
• Regular Mail: ZyXEL Communications Corp., 6 Innovation Road II, Science Park,
Hsinchu 300, Taiwan
Costa Rica
• Support E-mail: soporte@zyxel.co.cr
• Sales E-mail: sales@zyxel.co.cr
• Telephone: +506-2017878
• Fax: +506-2015098
• Web: www.zyxel.co.cr
• FTP: ftp.zyxel.co.cr
• Regular Mail: ZyXEL Costa Rica, Plaza Roble Escazú, Etapa El Patio, Tercer Piso, San
José, Costa Rica
Czech Republic
• E-mail: info@cz.zyxel.com
• Telephone: +420-241-091-350
• Fax: +420-241-091-359
• Web: www.zyxel.cz
Appendix A Customer Support
NBG334S User’s Guide
268
• Regular Mail: ZyXEL Communications, Czech s.r.o., Modranská 621, 143 01 Praha 4 -
Modrany, Ceská Republika
Denmark
• Support E-mail: support@zyxel.dk
• Sales E-mail: sales@zyxel.dk
• Telephone: +45-39-55-07-00
• Fax: +45-39-55-07-07
• Web: www.zyxel.dk
• Regular Mail: ZyXEL Communications A/S, Columbusvej, 2860 Soeborg, Denmark
Finland
• Support E-mail: support@zyxel.fi
• Sales E-mail: sales@zyxel.fi
• Telephone: +358-9-4780-8411
• Fax: +358-9-4780-8448
• Web: www.zyxel.fi
• Regular Mail: ZyXEL Communications Oy, Malminkaari 10, 00700 Helsinki, Finland
France
• E-mail: info@zyxel.fr
• Telephone: +33-4-72-52-97-97
• Fax: +33-4-72-52-19-20
• Web: www.zyxel.fr
• Regular Mail: ZyXEL France, 1 rue des Vergers, Bat. 1 / C, 69760 Limonest, France
Germany
• Support E-mail: support@zyxel.de
• Sales E-mail: sales@zyxel.de
• Telephone: +49-2405-6909-69
• Fax: +49-2405-6909-99
• Web: www.zyxel.de
• Regular Mail: ZyXEL Deutschland GmbH., Adenauerstr. 20/A2 D-52146, Wuerselen,
Germany
Hungary
• Support E-mail: support@zyxel.hu
• Sales E-mail: info@zyxel.hu
• Telephone: +36-1-3361649
• Fax: +36-1-3259100
• Web: www.zyxel.hu
• Regular Mail: ZyXEL Hungary, 48, Zoldlomb Str., H-1025, Budapest, Hungary
Appendix A Customer Support
NBG334S User’s Guide
269
India
• Support E-mail: support@zyxel.in
• Sales E-mail: sales@zyxel.in
• Telephone: +91-11-30888144 to +91-11-30888153
• Fax: +91-11-30888149, +91-11-26810715
• Web: http://www.zyxel.in
• Regular Mail: India - ZyXEL Technology India Pvt Ltd., II-Floor, F2/9 Okhla Phase -1,
New Delhi 110020, India
Japan
• Support E-mail: support@zyxel.co.jp
• Sales E-mail: zyp@zyxel.co.jp
• Telephone: +81-3-6847-3700
• Fax: +81-3-6847-3705
• Web: www.zyxel.co.jp
• Regular Mail: ZyXEL Japan, 3F, Office T&U, 1-10-10 Higashi-Gotanda, Shinagawa-ku,
Tokyo 141-0022, Japan
Kazakhstan
• Support: http://zyxel.kz/support
• Sales E-mail: sales@zyxel.kz
• Telephone: +7-3272-590-698
• Fax: +7-3272-590-689
• Web: www.zyxel.kz
• Regular Mail: ZyXEL Kazakhstan, 43 Dostyk Ave., Office 414, Dostyk Business Centre,
050010 Almaty, Republic of Kazakhstan
Malaysia
• Support E-mail: support@zyxel.com.my
• Sales E-mail: sales@zyxel.com.my
• Telephone: +603-8076-9933
• Fax: +603-8076-9833
• Web: http://www.zyxel.com.my
• Regular Mail: ZyXEL Malaysia Sdn Bhd., 1-02 & 1-03, Jalan Kenari 17F, Bandar
Puchong Jaya, 47100 Puchong, Selangor Darul Ehsan, Malaysia
North America
• Support E-mail: support@zyxel.com
• Sales E-mail: sales@zyxel.com
• Telephone: +1-800-255-4101, +1-714-632-0882
• Fax: +1-714-632-0858
• Web: www.us.zyxel.com
• FTP: ftp.us.zyxel.com
Appendix A Customer Support
NBG334S User’s Guide
270
• Regular Mail: ZyXEL Communications Inc., 1130 N. Miller St., Anaheim, CA 92806-
2001, U.S.A.
Norway
• Support E-mail: support@zyxel.no
• Sales E-mail: sales@zyxel.no
• Telephone: +47-22-80-61-80
• Fax: +47-22-80-61-81
• Web: www.zyxel.no
• Regular Mail: ZyXEL Communications A/S, Nils Hansens vei 13, 0667 Oslo, Norway
Poland
• E-mail: info@pl.zyxel.com
• Telephone: +48-22-333 8250
• Fax: +48-22-333 8251
• Web: www.pl.zyxel.com
• Regular Mail: ZyXEL Communications, ul. Okrzei 1A, 03-715 Warszawa, Poland
Russia
• Support: http://zyxel.ru/support
• Sales E-mail: sales@zyxel.ru
• Telephone: +7-095-542-89-29
• Fax: +7-095-542-89-25
• Web: www.zyxel.ru
• Regular Mail: ZyXEL Russia, Ostrovityanova 37a Str., Moscow 117279, Russia
Singapore
• Support E-mail: support@zyxel.com.sg
• Sales E-mail: sales@zyxel.com.sg
• Telephone: +65-6899-6678
• Fax: +65-6899-8887
• Web: http://www.zyxel.com.sg
• Regular Mail: ZyXEL Singapore Pte Ltd., No. 2 International Business Park, The
Strategry #03-28, Singapore 609930
Spain
• Support E-mail: support@zyxel.es
• Sales E-mail: sales@zyxel.es
• Telephone: +34-902-195-420
• Fax: +34-913-005-345
• Web: www.zyxel.es
• Regular Mail: ZyXEL Communications, Arte, 21 5ª planta, 28033 Madrid, Spain
Appendix A Customer Support
NBG334S User’s Guide
271
Sweden
• Support E-mail: support@zyxel.se
• Sales E-mail: sales@zyxel.se
• Telephone: +46-31-744-7700
• Fax: +46-31-744-7701
• Web: www.zyxel.se
• Regular Mail: ZyXEL Communications A/S, Sjöporten 4, 41764 Göteborg, Sweden
Thailand
• Support E-mail: support@zyxel.co.th
• Sales E-mail: sales@zyxel.co.th
• Telephone: +662-831-5315
• Fax: +662-831-5395
• Web: http://www.zyxel.co.th
• Regular Mail: ZyXEL Thailand Co., Ltd., 1/1 Moo 2, Ratchaphruk Road, Bangrak-Noi,
Muang, Nonthaburi 11000, Thailand.
Ukraine
• Support E-mail: support@ua.zyxel.com
• Sales E-mail: sales@ua.zyxel.com
• Telephone: +380-44-247-69-78
• Fax: +380-44-494-49-32
• Web: www.ua.zyxel.com
• Regular Mail: ZyXEL Ukraine, 13, Pimonenko Str., Kiev 04050, Ukraine
United Kingdom
• Support E-mail: support@zyxel.co.uk
• Sales E-mail: sales@zyxel.co.uk
• Telephone: +44-1344-303044, 08707-555779 (UK only)
• Fax: +44-1344-303034
• Web: www.zyxel.co.uk
• FTP: ftp.zyxel.co.uk
• Regular Mail: ZyXEL Communications UK Ltd., 11 The Courtyard, Eastern Road,
Bracknell, Berkshire RG12 2XB, United Kingdom (UK)
Appendix A Customer Support
NBG334S User’s Guide
272
Index
NBG334S User’s Guide
273
Index
Numerics
802.11 Mode 84
A
access point, see AP 29
ActiveX 134
address resolution protocol (ARP) 105
Alert 178
alternative subnet mask notation 225
any IP
note 105
AP 29, 61, 199, 249
AP Mode 29, 199
LAN settings 65
login 65
menu 64
overview 61
status screen 62
Asymmetrical routes 128
and IP alias 128
see also triangle routes 128
B
Backup configuration 193
Bandwidth management 58
application-based 143
classes and priorities 148
monitor 152
overview 143
priority 144
services 145
subnet-based 143
Bandwidth management monitor 40
Basic wireless security 49
BitTorrent 145
BSS 247
C
CA 253
Certificate Authority 253
certifications 263
notices 264
viewing 264
Channel 37, 63, 249
Interference 249
channel 69
command interface 31
Configuration 192
backup 193
reset the factory defaults 194
restore 193
contact information 267
Content Filtering
Days and Times 133
Restrict Web Features 133
Cookies 134
copyright 263
CPU usage 37, 63
CTS (Clear to Send) 250
customer support 267
D
Daylight saving 175
DDNS 123
see also Dynamic DNS
DHCP 41, 109
DHCP server
see also Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DHCP client information 111
DHCP client list 111
DHCP server 103, 109
DHCP table 41, 111
DHCP client information
DHCP status
Dimensions 211
disclaimer 263
DNS 55, 110
DNS server
see also Domain name system
Index
NBG334S User’s Guide
274
DNS (Domain Name System) 157
DNS server 110
Domain name 47
vs host name. see also system name
Domain Name System 110
duplex setting 38, 64
Dynamic DNS 123
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol 109
Dynamic WEP Key Exchange 254
DynDNS Wildcard 123
E
EAP Authentication 253
e-mail 87
Encryption 255
encryption 72
and local (user) database 73
key 73
WPA compatible 73
ESS 248
ESSID 207
Extended Service Set 248
Extended wireless security 50
F
Factory LAN defaults 103
FCC interference statement 263
feature specifications 213
File Transfer Program 145
Firewall 127
Firewall overview
guidelines 128
ICMP packets 130
network security
Stateful inspection 127
ZyXEL device firewall 127
Firmware upload 191
file extension
using HTTP
firmware version 37, 63
Fragmentation Threshold 83, 250
FTP 31, 156
FTP. see also File Transfer Program 145
G
gateway 140
General wireless LAN screen 75
H
Hidden Node 249
HTTP 145
Hyper Text Transfer Protocol 145
I
IANA 230
IBSS 247
IEEE 802.11g 251
IGMP 93, 104
see also Internet Group Multicast Protocol
version
IGMP version 93, 104
Independent Basic Service Set 247
Install UPnP 161
Windows Me 161
Windows XP 162
Internet Assigned Numbers Authority
See IANA
Internet connection
Ethernet
PPPoE. see also PPP over Ethernet
PPTP
WAN connection
Internet connection wizard 50
Internet Group Multicast Protocol 93, 104
IP Address 106, 115
IP address 55
dynamic
IP alias 106
IP packet transmission 104
Broadcast
Multicast
Unicast
IP Pool 109
J
Java 134
Index
NBG334S User’s Guide
275
L
LAN 103
IP pool setup 103
LAN overview 103
LAN Setup 93
LAN setup 103
LAN TCP/IP 103
Link type 38, 63
local (user) database 72
and encryption 73
Local Area Network 103
Log 177
M
MAC 82
MAC address 71, 93
cloning 57, 93
MAC address filter 71
MAC address filtering 82
MAC filter 82
managing the device
good habits 31
using FTP. See FTP.
using Telnet. See command interface.
using the command interface. See command
interface.
using the web configurator. See web configurator.
Media access control 82
Memory usage 37, 63
menu
AP Mode 64
Metric 141
MSN messenger 145
MSN Webcam 145
Multicast 93, 104
IGMP 93, 104
N
NAT 113, 115, 230
overview 113
port forwarding 113
see also Network Address Translation
server sets 113
NAT session 120
NAT Traversal 159
Navigation Panel 38, 64
navigation panel 38, 64
NetBIOS 102, 108
see also Network Basic Input/Output System 102
network
setup 199
Network Address Translation 113, 115
Network Basic Input/Output System 108
network setup 199
example 91
O
Operating Channel 37, 63
Output Power 84
P
P2P 145
peer-to-peer 145
Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet 51, 95
Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol 52, 98
Pool Size 109
Port forwarding 113, 115
default server 113
example 114
local server 115
port numbers
services
port speed 38, 64
Power Specification 211
PPPoE 51, 95
benefits 52
dial-up connection
see also Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet 51
PPTP 52, 98
see also Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol 52
Preamble Mode 251
priorities 75
Private 141
product registration 265
Q
QoS 75
QoS priorities 75
Index
NBG334S User’s Guide
276
Quality of Service (QoS) 84
R
RADIUS 252
Shared Secret Key 253
RADIUS Message Types 252
RADIUS Messages 252
RADIUS server 72
registration
product 265
related documentation 3
Remote management 153
and NAT 154
and the firewall 153
FTP 156
limitations 153
remote management session 153
system timeout 154
Reset button 35, 194
Reset the device 35
Restore configuration 193
Restrict Web Features 134
RF (Radio Frequency) 212
RoadRunner 95
Roaming 83
roaming 73
requirements 74
router 30, 199
Router Mode 30, 199
RTS (Request To Send) 250
RTS Threshold 249, 250
RTS/CTS Threshold 83
S
safety warnings 6
Security Parameters 257
Service and port numbers 146
Service Set 76
Service Set IDentification 76
Service Set IDentity. See SSID.
services
and port numbers 259
and protocols 259
Session Initiated Protocol 145
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol 180
SIP 145
SMTP 180
SNMP 128
SSID 37, 63, 69, 76
Static DHCP 110
Static Route 139
Static route
and remote node
overview
Status 35
status screen
AP Mode 62
subnet 223
Subnet Mask 106
subnet mask 55, 224
subnetting 226
Summary 40
Bandwidth management monitor 40
DHCP table 41
Packet statistics 41
Wireless station status 42
syntax conventions 4
Sys Op Mode
overview 199
selecting 200
System General Setup 173
System Name 173
System name 46
vs computer name
System restart 194
T
TCP/IP configuration 109
Telnet 155
Temperature 211
Time setting 174
trademarks 263
Triangle routes
and IP alias 128
see also asymmetrical routes 128
trigger port 118
Trigger port forwarding 118
example 118
process 118
U
Universal Plug and Play 159
Index
NBG334S User’s Guide
277
Application 159
UPnP 159
Forum 160
security issues 159
URL Keyword Blocking 134
Use Authentication 255
user authentication 72
local (user) database 72
RADIUS server 72
User Name 124
V
VoIP 145
VPN 98
W
WAN
IP address assignment 54
WAN advanced 101
WAN IP address 54
WAN IP address assignment 56
WAN MAC address 93
warranty 265
note 265
Web Configurator
how to access 33
Overview 33
Web configurator
navigating 35
web configurator 31
Web Proxy 134
WEP Encryption 78
WEP encryption 77
WEP key 77
Wi-Fi Multimedia QoS 75
Wildcard 123
Windows Networking 108
Wireless association list 42
wireless channel 207
wireless LAN 207
Wireless LAN wizard 47
Wireless network
basic guidelines 69
channel 69
encryption 72
example 69
MAC address filter 71
overview 69
security 70
SSID 69
Wireless security 70
overview 71
type 71
wireless security 207
example 89
Wireless tutorial 61, 89
Wizard setup 45
Bandwidth management 58
complete 59
Internet connection 50
system information 46
wireless LAN 47
WLAN
Interference 249
Security Parameters 257
WMM 75
WMM priorities 75
World Wide Web 145
WPA compatible 73
WPA, WPA2 254
WPS 32
WWW 87, 145
X
Xbox Live 145
Z
ZyNOS 37, 63
Index
NBG334S User’s Guide
278
… 148 …

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw ZyXEL NBG334S bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van ZyXEL NBG334S in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 9,51 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Andere handleiding(en) van ZyXEL NBG334S

ZyXEL NBG334S Snelstart handleiding - Deutsch, English, Français, Italiano, Espanõl, Svenska - 71 pagina's


Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info